2, Promag P300 - BA01393DEN - 0522-00

BA01393D/06/EN/05.
22-00 Products Solutions Services

71574903
2022-08-01
Valid as of version
01.06.zz (Device firmware)
Operating Instructions
Proline Promag P 300
Electromagnetic flowmeter
HART
Proline Promag P 300 HART
• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available when
working on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific to
working procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates to
these instructions.
2 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Table of contents
Table of contents
1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1 Mounting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6.1.2 Environment and process
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols . . . . . 6 6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 27
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2 Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.5 Symbols for 6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
certain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 27
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 32
1.3.1 Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 33
1.4 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6.3 Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.1 Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.2 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7.2 Connecting requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3 Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.4 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.2.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 35
2.5 Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 7.2.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.6 IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.2.4 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 38
2.7 Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.3 Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 38
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write 7.3.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 38
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 7.3.2 Connecting the remote display and
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11 operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 41
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 7.4 Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.7.4 Access via OPC-UA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 7.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.7.5 Access via service interface (CDI- 7.4.2 Connection examples for standard
RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
7.4.3 Connection example with the
3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 potential of medium not equal to
protective ground without the
3.1 Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 "Floating measurement" option . . . . . . 43
7.4.4 Connection examples with the
4 Incoming acceptance and product potential of medium not equal to
protective ground with the "Floating
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
measurement" option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.1 Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.5 Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2 Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 7.5.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16 7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 7.7 Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18
8 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5 Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
8.1 Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
5.1 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 8.2 Structure and function of the operating
5.2 Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting 8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 52
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20 8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.3 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Endress+Hauser 3
Table of contents Proline Promag P 300 HART
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 59 10.5 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 61 10.5.1 Using the parameter to enter the
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 61 access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
8.3.8 Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 10.5.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 110
8.3.9 Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 62 10.5.3 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 110
8.3.10 User roles and related access 10.5.4 Carrying out additional display
authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access 10.5.5 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 116
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 10.5.6 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad 10.5.7 Configuration management . . . . . . . 118
lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 10.5.8 Using parameters for device
8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 10.6 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
8.4.1 Function scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 10.7 Protecting settings from unauthorized access 124
8.4.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 10.7.1 Write protection via access code . . . 124
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 66 10.7.2 Write protection via write protection
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 70 11 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.5 Access to the operating menu via the 11.1 Reading off the device locking status . . . . . . 127
operating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 71 11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370 . . . . . . . 74 11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
8.5.3 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 127
8.5.4 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
8.5.5 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 129
8.5.6 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
8.5.7 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . 77 11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
9 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 11.6.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer"
9.1 Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 78 parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 78 11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 totalizers" parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.2 Measured variables via HART protocol . . . . . . 78 11.7 Show data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
9.3 Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 137
10 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 12.1 General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 82 diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.3 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.4 Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 82 12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 141
10.4.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
10.4.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 84 12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 143
10.4.3 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 86 12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 143
10.4.4 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 87 12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.4.5 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 87 12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 144
10.4.6 Configuring the current output . . . . . 89 12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
10.4.7 Configuring the pulse/frequency/ DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.4.8 Configuring the local display . . . . . . . 98 12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 146
10.4.9 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 100 12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 146
10.4.10 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 101 12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 146
10.4.11 Configuring the HART input . . . . . . 101 12.6.2 Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . 146
10.4.12 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 104 12.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 147
10.4.13 Configuring the double pulse output 105 12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
10.4.14 Configuring flow damping . . . . . . . . 106 12.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
4 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Table of contents
12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 152
12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 153
12.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 153
12.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.11.1 Function scope of "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
12.14 Device history and compatibility . . . . . . . . . . 158
13 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.1 Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
14 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
14.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 160
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 160
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 161
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 161
15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.1 Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
15.2 Communication-specific accessories . . . . . . . 163
15.3 Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
15.4 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
16.10 Custody transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
16.11 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
16.12 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
16.13 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
16.14 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16.15 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
16.16 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Endress+Hauser 5
About this document Proline Promag P 300 HART
1 About this document
1.1 Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information required in the various life cycle
phases of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance and storage, to
installation, connection, operation and commissioning, through to troubleshooting,
maintenance and disposal.
1.2 Symbols
1.2.1 Safety symbols

DANGER
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will result in
serious or fatal injury.
WARNING
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
serious or fatal injury.
CAUTION
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in
minor or medium injury.
NOTICE
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result in
personal injury.
1.2.2 Electrical symbols
Symbol Meaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via a
grounding system.
Potential equalization connection (PE: protective earth)

Ground terminals that must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other
connections.
The ground terminals are located on the interior and exterior of the device:
• Interior ground terminal: potential equalization is connected to the supply network.
• Exterior ground terminal: device is connected to the plant grounding system.
1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols
Symbol Meaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)

Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.
6 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART About this document
Symbol Meaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.
1.2.4 Tool symbols
Symbol Meaning
Flat-blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench
1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information
Symbol Meaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation
A Reference to page
Reference to graphic
Notice or individual step to be observed
1. , 2. , 3. … Series of steps
Result of a step
Help in the event of a problem
Visual inspection
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics
Symbol Meaning
1, 2, 3, ... Item numbers
1. , 2. , 3. , … Series of steps
A, B, C, ... Views
A-A, B-B, C-C, ... Sections
Hazardous area
-
Endress+Hauser 7
About this document Proline Promag P 300 HART
Symbol Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)

.
Flow direction
1.3 Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to the
following:
• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from the nameplate
• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the matrix code on the nameplate
1.3.1 Document function
Document type Purpose and content of the document
Technical Information (TI) Planning aid for your device

The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered for
the device.
Brief Operating Instructions (KA) Guide that takes you quickly to the 1st measured value
The Brief Operating Instructions contain all the essential information
from incoming acceptance to initial commissioning.
Operating Instructions (BA) Your reference guide

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required
in the various life cycle phases of the device: from product identification,
incoming acceptance and storage, to mounting, connection, operation
and commissioning, through to troubleshooting, maintenance and
disposal.
Description of Device Parameters Reference for your parameters

(GP) The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter. The description is aimed at those who work with the device
over the entire life cycle and perform specific configurations.
Safety Instructions (XA) Depending on the approval, safety instructions for electrical equipment in
hazardous areas are also supplied with the device. They are an integral
part of the Operating Instructions.
 The nameplate indicates which Safety Instructions (XA) apply to

the device in question.
Supplementary device-dependent Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version
documentation ordered: Always comply strictly with the instructions in the
supplementary documentation. The supplementary documentation is an
integral part of the device documentation.
1.4 Registered trademarks

HART®
Registered trademark of the FieldComm Group, Austin, Texas, USA
8 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Safety instructions
2 Safety instructions
2.1 Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:
‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual and
supplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on the
application).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:
‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility's
owner-operator.
‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.
2.2 Intended use

Application and media
The measuring device described in this manual is intended only for the flow measurement
of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or in applications
where there is an increased risk due to process pressure, are marked accordingly on the
nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate and
the general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for the
intended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospheric
temperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation→  8.
‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.
LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
Endress+Hauser 9
Safety instructions Proline Promag P 300 HART
NOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:
‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistance
in verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level of
contamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks
LWARNING
If the temperature of the media or electronics unit is high or low, this may cause the
surfaces of the device to become hot or cold. This poses a risk of burns or frostbite!
‣ In the case of hot or cold medium temperatures, install appropriate protection against
contact.
2.3 Workplace safety

When working on and with the device:
‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment as per national regulations.
2.4 Operational safety

Risk of injury!
‣ Operate the device only if it is in proper technical condition, free from errors and faults.
‣ The operator is responsible for the interference-free operation of the device.
Modifications to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers!
‣ If modifications are nevertheless required, consult with the manufacturer.
Repair
To ensure continued operational safety and reliability:
‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to the repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use only original spare parts and accessories.
2.5 Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meet
state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition in
which it is safe to operate.
It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.
Furthermore, the device meets the legal requirements of the applicable UK regulations
(Statutory Instruments). These are listed in the UKCA Declaration of Conformity along
with the designated standards.
By selecting the order option for UKCA marking, Endress+Hauser confirms a successful
evaluation and testing of the device by affixing the UKCA mark.
10 Endress+Hauser
Contact address Endress+Hauser UK:

Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Floats Road
Manchester M23 9NF
United Kingdom
www.uk.endress.com
2.6 IT security
Our warranty is valid only if the product is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The product is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the product and associated
data transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.
2.7 Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on the
operator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater in-
operation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section:
Function/interface Factory setting Recommendation
Write protection via hardware write Not enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment
protection switch →  11
Access code Not enabled Assign a customized access code during

(also applies for Web server login or (0000) commissioning
FieldCare connection) →  12
WLAN Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment

(order option in display module)
WLAN security mode Enabled (WPA2- Do not change

PSK)
WLAN passphrase Serial number Assign a customized WLAN passphrase during

(password) →  12 commissioning
WLAN mode Access point On an individual basis following risk assessment
Web server →  12 Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment
CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13 – On an individual basis following risk assessment
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the parameters of the device via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch
(DIP switch on the main electronics module). When hardware write protection is enabled,
only read access to the parameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  126.
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or access
to the device via the WLAN interface.
Endress+Hauser 11
Safety instructions Proline Promag P 300 HART
• User-specific access code

Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or
tablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool
(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code
(→  124).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to
0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point

A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  73), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with the
IEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter
(→  118).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator for
access.
General notes on the use of passwords

• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed during
commissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code and
network key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose the
password, for example, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  124
2.7.3 Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  64). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or the WLAN
interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:
The "Description of Device Parameters" document →  197.
12 Endress+Hauser
2.7.4 Access via OPC-UA

The device can communicate with OPC UA clients using the "OPC UA Server" application
package.
The OPC UA server integrated in the device can be accessed via the WLAN access point
using the WLAN interface - which can be ordered as an optional extra - or the service
interface (CDI- RJ45) via Ethernet network. Access rights and authorization as per
separate configuration.
The following Security Modes are supported as per the OPC UA Specification (IEC 62541):
• None
• Basic128Rsa15 – signed
• Basic128Rsa15 – signed and encrypted
2.7.5 Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Device-
specific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of access
authorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.
Transmitters with an Ex de approval may not be connected via the service interface
(CDI-RJ45)!
Order code for "Approval transmitter + sensor", options (Ex de): BA, BB, C1, C2, GA,
GB, MA, MB, NA, NB
Endress+Hauser 13
Product description Proline Promag P 300 HART
3 Product description
The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
3.1 Product design
1 2 3 4
Ni
Spcht Pow
an un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
öf
er t op öf
f ne
Ne gize fn
so pa den when
n
us s ou
tens vr en
ionir
ter
I/O
un
Nicht
la y
i sp
D
e
ar
ES
C
–
5
A0029586
1 Important components of a measuring device

1 Connection compartment cover
2 Display module
3 Transmitter housing
4 Electronics compartment cover
5 Sensor
14 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Incoming acceptance and product identification
4 Incoming acceptance and product

identification
4.1 Incoming acceptance

Are the order codes on the
delivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?
1 1
2 2
Are the goods undamaged?
Do the data on the

Order code:
Ser. no.:
nameplate match the
ordering information on the
Ext. ord. cd.:
delivery note?
i i
Date:
Is the envelope present with

accompanying documents?
• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  16.
4.2 Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:
• Nameplate specifications
• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates in the Device Viewer
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): all the information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial numbers from the nameplates into the Endress+Hauser Operations App
or scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate with the Endress+Hauser Operations App:
all the information about the device is displayed.
Endress+Hauser 15
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promag P 300 HART
following:
• The chapters "Additional standard documentation on the device" and "Supplementary
device-dependent documentation"
• The Device Viewer: Enter the serial number from the nameplate
(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)
• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate or
scan the DataMatrix code on the nameplate.
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate
1 2 3 4 5
Order code:
Ser. no.:
Ext. ord. cd.:
20 6
19
7
18
17
16
15
14 8
i i
Date: 9
13 12 11 10
A0029192
2 Example of a transmitter nameplate

1 Place of manufacture
2 Name of the transmitter
3 Order code
4 Serial number (Ser. no.)
5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
6 Degree of protection
7 Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
8 Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
9 2-D matrix code
10 Date of manufacture: year-month
11 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
12 Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, RCM tick
13 Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
14 Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
15 Space for additional information in the case of special products
16 Permitted temperature range for cable
17 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
18 Information on cable gland
19 Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
20 Electrical connection data: supply voltage
16 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Incoming acceptance and product identification
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate
2
Order code: 3
Ser. no.: 4
Ext. ord. cd.: 5
13
i i 8
Date:
9
12 11 10
A0029205
3 Example of sensor nameplate

1 Name of the sensor
2 Place of manufacture
3 Order code
4 Serial number (Ser. no.)
5 Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
6 Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; medium
temperature range; material of liner and electrodes
7 Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
8 Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
9 2-D matrix code
10 Date of manufacture: year-month
11 Flow direction
12 CE mark, RCM-Tick mark
13 Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)
Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) are
always listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approval-
related specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are also
ordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE
+).
Endress+Hauser 17
Incoming acceptance and product identification Proline Promag P 300 HART
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device
Symbol Meaning
WARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury. To determine the nature of the potential hazard and the measures required to
avoid it, consult the documentation accompanying the measuring device.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection

A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.
18 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Storage and transport
5 Storage and transport
5.1 Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:
‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring pipe.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature →  179
5.2 Transporting the product

Transport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.
A0029252
Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They

prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in the
measuring tube.
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).
A0029214
Endress+Hauser 19
Mounting Proline Promag P 300 HART
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.
LCAUTION
Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing.
‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.
A0029319
5.3 Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:
• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap, complying with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)
• Packaging
• Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
• Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol
• Carrying and securing materials
• Disposable plastic pallet
• Plastic straps
• Plastic adhesive strips
• Filler material
Paper pads
6 Mounting
6.1 Mounting requirements
6.1.1 Mounting position
Mounting location
• Do not install the device at the highest point of the pipe.
• Do not install the device upstream from a free pipe outlet in a down pipe.
20 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Mounting
A0042131
The device should ideally be installed in an ascending pipe.
A0042317
Installation near valves

Install the device in the direction of flow upstream from the valve.
A0041091
Installation upstream from a down pipe

NOTICE
Negative pressure in the measuring pipe can damage the liner!
‣ If installing upstream of down pipes whose length h ≥ 5 m (16.4 ft): install a siphon
with a vent valve downstream of the device.
This arrangement prevents the flow of liquid stopping in the pipe and air
entrainment.
1
2
h
A0028981
1 Vent valve
2 Pipe siphon
h Length of down pipe
Endress+Hauser 21
Installation with partially filled pipes

• Partially filled pipes with a gradient require a drain-type configuration.
• The installation of a cleaning valve is recommended.
N
xD
³2
N
xD
³5
A0041088
Installation near pumps

NOTICE
Negative pressure in the measuring pipe can damage the liner!
‣ In order to maintain the system pressure, install the device in the flow direction
downstream from the pump.
‣ Install pulsation dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps are used.
A0041083
• Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum

• Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock →  180
Installation of very heavy devices

Support required for nominal diameters of DN ≥ 350 mm (14 in).
NOTICE
Damage to the device!
If incorrect support is provided, the sensor housing could buckle and the internal magnetic
coils could be damaged.
‣ Only provide supports at the pipe flanges.
A0041087
Installation in event of pipe vibrations

A remote version is recommended in the event of strong pipe vibrations.
22 Endress+Hauser
NOTICE
Pipe vibrations can damage the device!
‣ Do not expose the device to strong vibrations.
‣ Support the pipe and fix it in place.
‣ Support the device and fix it in place.
‣ Mount the sensor and transmitter separately.
L > 10 m (33 ft)
A0041092
Information on the measuring system's resistance to vibration and shock →  180
Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
Orientation Recommendation
Vertical orientation
A0015591
1)
Horizontal orientation, transmitter at top
A0015589
2) 3)
Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
4)
bottom
A0015590
Horizontal orientation, transmitter at

side
A0015592
1) Applications with low process temperatures may reduce the ambient temperature. To maintain the
minimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
2) Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
3) To prevent the electronics from overheating in the event of strong heat formation (e.g. CIP or SIP cleaning
process), install the device with the transmitter part pointing downwards.
4) When the empty pipe detection function is switched on, empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter
housing is pointing upwards.
Endress+Hauser 23
Vertical
Optimum for self-emptying pipe systems and for use in conjunction with empty pipe
detection.
A0015591
Horizontal
• Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
• Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards as
otherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually
respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.
2 2
A0029344
1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection

2 Measuring electrodes for signal detection
3 Reference electrode for potential equalization
Measuring devices with tantalum or platinum electrodes can be ordered without an

EPD electrode. In this case, empty pipe detection is performed via the measuring
electrodes.
Inlet and outlet runs
Installation with inlet and outlet runs

Installation with elbows, pumps or valves
To avoid a vacuum and to maintain the specified level of accuracy, if possible install the
device upstream from assemblies that produce turbulence (e.g. valves, T-sections) and
downstream from pumps.
Maintain straight, unimpeded inlet and outlet runs.
≥ 5 × DN ≥ 2 × DN
A0028997
24 Endress+Hauser
≥ 2 × DN
A0042132
Installation without inlet and outlet runs

Depending on the device design and installation location, the inlet and outlet runs can be
reduced or omitted entirely.
Devices and possible order options on request.
Maximum measured error
When the device is installed with the inlet and outlet runs described, a maximum
measured error of ±0.5 % of the reading ±1 mm/s (0.04 in/s) can be guaranteed.
Installation before or after bends

Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible.
≥ 0 × DN
Installation downstream of pumps

Installation upstream of valves

Installation downstream of valves

Installation without inlet and outlet runs is possible if the valve is 100% open during
operation.
Dimensions
For the dimensions and installed lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information"
document, "Mechanical construction" section
6.1.2 Environment and process requirements
Ambient temperature range
Transmitter Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)
Local display –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be
impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.
Endress+Hauser 25
Sensor • Process connection material, carbon steel:

–10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)
• Process connection material, stainless steel:
–40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)
Liner Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .
If operating outdoors:
• Install the measuring device in a shady location.
• Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions.
System pressure
Installation near pumps →  22
Vibrations
Installation in event of pipe vibrations →  22
Thermal insulation
If process fluids are very hot, it is necessary to insulate pipes in order to reduce energy loss
and to prevent individuals from accidentally coming into contact with hot pipes. Please
observe the applicable standards and guidelines for insulating pipes.
A housing support/an extended neck is used for heat dissipation:
• Devices with the order code for "Lining", option B "PFA high-temperature" always
come with a housing support.
• In the case of all other devices, a housing support can be ordered via the order code
for "Sensor option", option CG "Sensor extended neck".
LWARNING
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ The housing support is used for heat dissipation and must be completely free (i.e.
uncovered). At the very maximum, the sensor insulation may extend as far as the
upper edge of the two sensor half-shells.
max.
A0031216
Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor
in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring
accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to
calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.
1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.
26 Endress+Hauser
2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity
(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
100 [mbar]
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s
3 m/s 10
max. 8° 2 m/s
d D
1 m/s 1
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 d/D

A0029002
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions
Weather protection cover
280 (11.0) 255 (10.0)

146 (5.75) 134 (5.3) 12 (0.47) 30 (1.18)
48 (1.9)
A0029553
4 Engineering unit mm (in)
6.2 Mounting the measuring device
6.2.1 Required tools
For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: use a suitable mounting tool
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device

1. Remove all remaining transport packaging.
2. Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.
3. Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.
Endress+Hauser 27
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of the
process connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the seals are clean and undamaged.
‣ Secure the seals correctly.
1. Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of
the medium.
2. To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device
between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.
3. If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided.
4. Observe the necessary screw tightening torques →  28.
5. Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.

A0029263
Mounting the seals

LCAUTION
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube!
Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
‣ Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
1. For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1.
2. For a "PFA" liner: additional seals are generally not required.
3. For a "PTFE" liner: additional seals are generally not required.
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks

Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions
for the use of ground cables/ground disks .
Screw tightening torques

Please note the following:
• The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress.
• Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing surface or damage the seal.
Nominal screw tightening torques →  31
28 Endress+Hauser
Maximum screw tightening torques
Maximum screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)

Nominal Pressure rating Screws Flange thickness Max. screw tightening torque
diameter [Nm]
[mm] [bar] [mm] [mm] PTFE PFA
15 PN 40 4 × M12 16 11 –
25 PN 40 4 × M12 18 26 20
32 PN 40 4 × M16 18 41 35
40 PN 40 4 × M16 18 52 47
50 PN 40 4 × M16 20 65 59
1)
65 PN 16 8 × M16 18 43 40
65 PN 40 8 × M16 22 43 40
80 PN 16 8 × M16 20 53 48
80 PN 40 8 × M16 24 53 48
100 PN 16 8 × M16 20 57 51
100 PN 40 8 × M20 24 78 70
125 PN 16 8 × M16 22 75 67
125 PN 40 8 × M24 26 111 99
150 PN 16 8 × M20 22 99 85
150 PN 40 8 × M24 28 136 120
200 PN 10 8 × M20 24 141 101
200 PN 16 12 × M20 24 94 67
200 PN 25 12 × M24 30 138 105
250 PN 10 12 × M20 26 110 –
250 PN 16 12 × M24 26 131 –
250 PN 25 12 × M27 32 200 –
300 PN 10 12 × M20 26 125 –
300 PN 16 12 × M24 28 179 –
300 PN 25 16 × M27 34 204 –
350 PN 10 16 × M20 26 188 –
350 PN 16 16 × M24 30 254 –
350 PN 25 16 × M30 38 380 –
400 PN 10 16 × M24 26 260 –
400 PN 16 16 × M27 32 330 –
400 PN 25 16 × M33 40 488 –
450 PN 10 20 × M24 28 235 –
450 PN 16 20 × M27 40 300 –
450 PN 25 20 × M33 46 385 –
500 PN 10 20 × M24 28 265 –
500 PN 16 20 × M30 34 448 –
500 PN 25 20 × M33 48 533 –
600 PN 10 20 × M27 28 345 –
Endress+Hauser 29
Nominal Pressure rating Screws Flange thickness Max. screw tightening torque
diameter [Nm]
[mm] [bar] [mm] [mm] PTFE PFA
600 PN 16 20 × M33 36 658 –
600 PN 25 20 × M36 58 731 –
1) Sizing as per EN 1092-1 (not DIN 2501)
Screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5, Class 150/300

Nominal diameter Pressure rating Screws Max. screw tightening torque [Nm]
([lbf · ft])
[mm] [in] [psi] [in] PTFE PFA
15 ½ Class 150 4×½ 6 (4) – (–)
15 ½ Class 300 4×½ 6 (4) – (–)
25 1 Class 150 4×½ 11 (8) 10 (7)
25 1 Class 300 4 × 5/8 14 (10) 12 (9)
40 1½ Class 150 4×½ 24 (18) 21 (15)
40 1½ Class 300 4×¾ 34 (25) 31 (23)
50 2 Class 150 4 × 5/8 47 (35) 44 (32)
50 2 Class 300 8 × 5/8 23 (17) 22 (16)
80 3 Class 150 4 × 5/8 79 (58) 67 (49)
80 3 Class 300 8×¾ 47 (35) 42 (31)
100 4 Class 150 8 × 5/8 56 (41) 50 (37)
100 4 Class 300 8×¾ 67 (49) 59 (44)
150 6 Class 150 8×¾ 106 (78) 86 (63)
150 6 Class 300 12 × ¾ 73 (54) 67 (49)
200 8 Class 150 8×¾ 143 (105) 109 (80)
250 10 Class 150 12 × 7/8 135 (100) – (–)
300 12 Class 150 12 × 7/8 178 (131) – (–)
350 14 Class 150 12 × 1 260 (192) – (–)
400 16 Class 150 16 × 1 246 (181) – (–)
450 18 Class 150 16 × 1 1/8 371 (274) – (–)
500 20 Class 150 20 × 1 1/8 341 (252) – (–)
600 24 Class 150 20 × 1 ¼ 477 (352) – (–)
Maximum screw tightening torques for JIS B2220

[mm] [bar] [mm] PTFE PFA
25 10K 4 × M16 32 27
20K 4 × M16 32 27
32 10K 4 × M16 38 –
20K 4 × M16 38 –
40 10K 4 × M16 41 37
20K 4 × M16 41 37
50 10K 4 × M16 54 46
30 Endress+Hauser
[mm] [bar] [mm] PTFE PFA
20K 8 × M16 27 23
65 10K 4 × M16 74 63
20K 8 × M16 37 31
80 10K 8 × M16 38 32
20K 8 × M20 57 46
100 10K 8 × M16 47 38
20K 8 × M20 75 58
125 10K 8 × M20 80 66
20K 8 × M22 121 103
150 10K 8 × M20 99 81
20K 12 × M22 108 72
200 10K 12 × M20 82 54
20K 12 × M22 121 88
250 10K 12 × M22 133 –
20K 12 × M24 212 –
300 10K 16 × M22 99 –
20K 16 × M24 183 –
Screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E

Nominal diameter Screws Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]
[mm] [mm] PTFE
25 4 × M12 21
50 4 × M16 42
Screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16

Nominal diameter Screws Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]
[mm] [mm] PTFE
50 4 × M16 42
Nominal screw tightening torques
Nominal screw tightening torques for JIS B2220

Nominal diameter Pressure rating Screws Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]
[mm] [bar] [mm] HG PUR
350 10K 16 × M22 109 109
20K 16 × M30×3 217 217
400 10K 16 × M24 163 163
20K 16 × M30×3 258 258
450 10K 16 × M24 155 155
20K 16 × M30×3 272 272
Endress+Hauser 31
Nominal diameter Pressure rating Screws Nom. screw tightening torque [Nm]
[mm] [bar] [mm] HG PUR
500 10K 16 × M24 183 183
20K 16 × M30×3 315 315
600 10K 16 × M30 235 235
20K 16 × M36×3 381 381
700 10K 16 × M30 300 300
750 10K 16 × M30 339 339
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.
4.
öf
öf
f ne
f ne
n
n
te r
te r
un
un
Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –
+ +
E E
e
e
ar ar
3 mm 1. 4 mm 7 Nm (5.2 lbf ft) 3.

2.
A0029993
5 Non-Ex housing
1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
2. Unscrew the connection compartment cover.
3. Loosen the securing screw.
4. Turn the housing to the desired position.
5. Tighten the securing screw.
6. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
7. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
32 Endress+Hauser
2. A
1. 4 mm 7 Nm (5.2 lbf !) 3.
A
A0043150
6 Ex housing
1. Loosen the fixing screws.

2. Turn the housing to the desired position.
3. Tighten the securing screws.
6.2.5 Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.
öf
öf
f ne
f ne
n
n
te r
te r
un
un
Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –
+ +
ES
C
E – E
e
e
ar ar
3 mm 1. 3.
2.
A0030035
1. Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
3. Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.
5. Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.
Endress+Hauser 33
6.3 Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 
Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?

For example:
• Process temperature
• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical 
Information" document )
• Ambient temperature
• Measuring range
Has the correct orientation been selected for the sensor →  23 ?

• According to sensor type 
• According to medium temperature
• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)
Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the actual direction of flow of the fluid through

the piping →  23?
Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)? 
Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight? 
Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque? 
34 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Electrical connection
7 Electrical connection
LWARNING
Live parts! Incorrect work performed on the electrical connections can result in an
electric shock.
‣ Set up a disconnecting device (switch or power-circuit breaker) to easily disconnect the
device from the supply voltage.
‣ In addition to the device fuse, include an overcurrent protection unit with max. 10 A in
the plant installation.
7.1 Electrical safety

In accordance with applicable national regulations.
7.2 Connecting requirements
7.2.1 Required tools

• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools
• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper
• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule
• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)
7.2.2 Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Protective grounding cable for the outer ground terminal

Conductor cross-section < 2.1 mm2 (14 AWG)
The use of a cable lug enables the connection of larger cross-sections.
The grounding impedance must be less than 2 Ω.
Permitted temperature range

• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cable (incl. conductor for the inner ground terminal)
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
Current output 4 to 20 mA HART
A shielded cable is recommended. Observe grounding concept of the plant.
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA

Standard installation cable is sufficient
Pulse /frequency /switch output

Endress+Hauser 35
Electrical connection Proline Promag P 300 HART
Double pulse output

Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Status input
Cable diameter
• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for connecting cable – remote display and operating module DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable

A cable is supplied depending on the order option
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option O
or
• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and
• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E
Standard cable 2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pair-
stranded)
Flame resistance According to DIN EN 60332-1-2
Oil resistance According to DIN EN 60811-2-1
Shield Tin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %
Capacitance: core/shield ≤ 200 pF/m
L/R ≤ 24 µH/Ω
Available cable length 5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)
Operating temperature When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)
Standard cable - customer-specific cable

With the following order option, no cable is supplied with the device and must be provided
by the customer:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable with the following minimum requirements can be used as the connecting
cable, even in the hazardous area (Zone 2, Class I, Division 2 and Zone 1, Class I, Division
1):
Standard cable 4 wires (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield, minimum wire cross-section
0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)
Shield Tin-plated copper braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %
Cable impedance (pair) Minimum 80 Ω
36 Endress+Hauser
Cable length Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), maximum loop impedance 20 Ω
Capacitance: core/shield Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1
L/R Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1
Endress+Hauser 37
7.2.3 Terminal assignment
Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs

The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual order
version of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on an
adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage Input/output 1 Input/output 2 Input/output 3
1 (+) 2 (–) 26 (+) 27 (–) 24 (+) 25 (–) 22 (+) 23 (–)
Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.
Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  41.
7.2.4 Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1. Remove dummy plug if present.
2. If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.
3. If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  35.
7.3 Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the device-
specific Ex documentation.
7.3.1 Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3
4
A0026781
1 Terminal connection for supply voltage

2 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
3 Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display and
operating module DKX001
4 Protective earth (PE)
38 Endress+Hauser
3.
öf
öf
f ne
f ne
n
n
te r
ter
un
un
Nicht
Nicht
ES
ES C
C
– –
+ +
E E
ES
C
–
e
e
ar + ar
4. E
3 mm 1. 3.
2.
A0029813
1. Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

3. Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.
4. Remove the display module holder.
Ni Ni
Spcht Pow Spcht Pow
an un an un
Do nu te er Do nu te er
en no ngr en no ngr
öf
öf
er t op öf
f ne
er t op öf
f ne
Ne gize fn Ne gize fn
so pa den when so pa den when
n
us s ou er us s ou
tens vr en tens vr en
ionir Powr en ionir
te fn n
un g öf whe
te r
te r
I/O ichtnnun en I/O
un
un
Npa t op
6. S noze d vrir
Doergis ouion
Nicht
Nicht
ene patens
N us
so
I/O
e
e
ar ar
ES ES
C C
– –
+ +
E E
5.
A0029814
5. Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6. Open the terminal cover.
8. 10 (0.4)
7.
öf
f ne
n
mm (in)
ter
un
Nicht
e
ar
ES
C
–
9. E
A0029815
7. Push the cable through the cable entry. To ensure tight sealing, do not remove the
sealing ring from the cable entry.
8. Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.
9. Connect the protective ground.
Endress+Hauser 39
11.
öf
f ne
n
22 mm
te r
un
Nicht
24 mm
e
ar
ES
C
–
10.
A0029816
10. Connect the cable according to the terminal assignment.

 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment is
documented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or
→  38.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.
12. Close the terminal cover.
13. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.
15. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.
Removing a cable
3 (0.12)
1.
2.
A0029598
7 Engineering unit mm (in)
1. To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes
2. while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.
40 Endress+Hauser
7.3.2 Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  162.
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.
Gnd
Vcc
A B
81 82 83 84
1
2
3
81 82 83 84
4
Gnd
A B
Vcc
5
A0027518
1 Remote display and operating module DKX001

2 Terminal connection for potential equalization (PE)
3 Connecting cable
4 Measuring device
5 Terminal connection for potential equalization (PE)
7.4 Ensuring potential equalization
7.4.1 Introduction
Correct potential equalization (equipotential bonding) is a prerequisite for stable and
reliable flow measurement. Inadequate or incorrect potential equalization can result in
device failure and present a safety hazard.
The following requirements must be observed to ensure correct, trouble-free
measurement:
• The principle that the medium, the sensor and the transmitter must be at the same
electrical potential applies.
• Take in-company grounding guidelines, materials and the grounding conditions and
potential conditions of the pipe into consideration.
• The necessary potential equalization connections must be established using a ground
cable with a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2) and a cable lug.
• In the case of remote device versions, the ground terminal in the example always refers
to the sensor and not to the transmitter.
You can order accessories such as ground cables and ground disks directly from
Endress+Hauser →  162
For devices intended for use in hazardous areas, observe the instructions in the
Ex documentation (XA).
Abbreviations used
• PE (Protective Earth): potential at the protective earth terminals of the device
• PP (Potential Pipe): potential of the pipe, measured at the flanges
• PM (Potential Medium): potential of the medium
Endress+Hauser 41
7.4.2 Connection examples for standard situations
Unlined and grounded metal pipe

• Potential equalization is via the measuring pipe.
• The medium is set to ground potential.
Starting conditions:
• Pipes are correctly grounded on both sides.
• Pipes are conductive and at the same electrical potential as the medium
PE = PP = PM
A0044854
‣ Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential by

means of the ground terminal provided for this purpose.
Metal pipe without liner

• Potential equalization is via the ground terminal and pipe flanges.
• The medium is set to ground potential.
• Pipes are not sufficiently grounded.
• Pipes are conductive and at the same electrical potential as the medium
DN ≤ 300 DN ≥ 350
PE = PP = PM
A0042089
1. Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them.
2. Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential by
3. For DN ≤ 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coating
of the sensor with the flange screws.
4. For DN ≥ 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe the screw tightening torques: see the Brief Operating Instructions for the
sensor.
42 Endress+Hauser
Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner

The medium is set to ground potential.
• The pipe has an insulating effect.
• Low-impedance medium grounding close to the sensor is not guaranteed.
• Equalizing currents through the medium cannot be ruled out.
PE = PP = PM
A0044856
1. Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal of the transmitter or sensor
connection housing via the ground cable.
2. Connect the connection to ground potential.
7.4.3 Connection example with the potential of medium not equal

to protective ground without the "Floating measurement"
option
In these cases, the medium potential can differ from the potential of the device.
Metal, ungrounded pipe

The sensor and transmitter are installed in a way that provides electrical insulation from
PE, e.g. applications for electrolytic processes or systems with cathodic protection.
• Unlined metal pipe
• Pipes with an electrically conductive liner
3.
+
2. –
PE ≠ PP = PM
A0042253
1. Connect the pipe flanges and transmitter via the ground cable.
2. Route the shielding of the signal lines via a capacitor (recommended value 1.5µF/
50V).
3. Device connected to power supply such that it is floating in relation to the protective
earth (isolation transformer). This measure is not required in the case of 24V DC
supply voltage without PE (= SELV power unit).
Endress+Hauser 43
7.4.4 Connection examples with the potential of medium not equal

to protective ground with the "Floating measurement" option
In these cases, the medium potential can differ from the potential of the device.
Introduction
The "Floating measurement" option enables the galvanic isolation of the measuring system
from the device potential. This minimizes harmful equalizing currents caused by
differences in potential between the medium and the device. The "Floating measurement"
option is optionally available: order code for "Sensor option", option CV
Operating conditions for the use of the "Floating measurement" option

Device version Compact version and remote version (length of connecting
cable ≤ 10 m)
Differences in voltage between medium potential As small as possible, usually in the mV range
and device potential
Alternating voltage frequencies in the medium Below typical power line frequency in the country
or at ground potential (PE)
To achieve the specified conductivity measuring accuracy, a conductivity calibration is

recommended when the device is installed.
A full pipe adjustment is recommended when the device is installed.
Plastic pipe
Sensor and transmitter are correctly grounded. A difference in potential can occur between
the medium and protective earth. Potential equalization between PM and PE via the
reference electrode is minimized with the "Floating measurement" option.
• The pipe has an insulating effect.
PE = PP ≠ PM
A0044855
1. Use the "Floating measurement" option, while also observing the operating conditions
for floating measurement.
2. Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential by
Metal, ungrounded pipe with insulating liner

The sensor and transmitter are installed in a way that provides electrical insulation from
PE. The medium and pipe have different potentials. The "Floating measurement" option
minimizes harmful equalizing currents between PM and PP via the reference electrode.
• Metal pipe with insulating liner
44 Endress+Hauser
3.
+
2. –
PE ≠ PP ≠ PM
A0044857
1. Connect the pipe flanges and transmitter via the ground cable.
2. Route the shielding of the signal cables via a capacitor (recommended value 1.5µF/
50V).
3. Device connected to power supply such that it is floating in relation to the protective
earth (isolation transformer). This measure is not required in the case of 24V DC
supply voltage without PE (= SELV power unit).
4. Use the "Floating measurement" option, while also observing the operating conditions
for floating measurement.
7.5 Special connection instructions
7.5.1 Connection examples
Current output 4 to 20 mA HART
1 2 3
4...20 mA
4 5
A0029055
8 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (active)

1 Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
2 Cable shield provided at one end. The cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC
requirements; observe cable specifications
3 Connection for HART operating devices →  71
4 Resistor for HART communication (≥ 250 Ω): observe maximum load →  169
5 Analog display unit: observe maximum load →  169
6 Transmitter
Endress+Hauser 45
1 2 3 4
4...20 mA
A0028762
9 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA HART current output (passive)

2 Power supply
5 Transmitter
HART input
1 2 3 4
4...20 mA
2 3
A0028763
 10 Connection example for HART input with a common negative (passive)

1 Automation system with HART output (e.g. PLC)
2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
5 Pressure transmitter (e.g. Cerabar M, Cerabar S): see requirements
6 Transmitter
Current output 4-20 mA
1 2
3
4...20 mA
A0028758
 11 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

3 Transmitter
46 Endress+Hauser
1 2 3
4
4...20 mA
A0028759
 12 Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

2 Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
4 Transmitter
Pulse/frequency output
1 2
12345
A0028761
 13 Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

1 Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC with 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter: observe input values →  171
Switch output
1 2
A0028760
 14 Connection example for switch output (passive)

1 Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
2 Power supply
Endress+Hauser 47
Double pulse output
1 3
4
A0029280
 15 Connection example for double pulse output (active)

1 Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC)
3 Double pulse output
4 Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted
2
1 4
5
A0029279
 16 Connection example for double pulse output (passive)

1 Automation system with double pulse input (e.g. PLC with a 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistor)
2 Power supply
4 Double pulse output
5 Double pulse output (slave), phase-shifted
Relay output
1 2
A0028760
 17 Connection example for relay output (passive)

1 Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
48 Endress+Hauser
Current input
1 2 3
A0028915
 18 Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

1 Power supply
2 Terminal box
3 External measuring device (to read in pressure or temperature, for instance)
4 Transmitter
Status input
1 2
A0028764
 19 Connection example for status input

1 Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
2 Power supply
3 Transmitter
7.6 Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the degree of protection IP66/67,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee the degree of protection IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1. Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.
2. Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.
3. Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.
4. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
Endress+Hauser 49
5. To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:

Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").

A0029278
6. Insert dummy plugs (corresponding to the housing degree of protection) into unused
cable entries.
7.7 Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)? 
Is the protective earthing established correctly?
Do the cables used comply with the requirements ? 
Do the mounted cables have adequate strain relief? 
Are all cable glands installed, securely tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"

→  49?
Is the terminal assignment correct ? 
If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module? 
Is the potential equalization established correctly ? 
Are dummy plugs inserted in unused cable entries and have transportation plugs been replaced
with dummy plugs?
50 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Operation options
8 Operation options
8.1 Overview of operation options
ESC
- + E
1 2 3 4 5 6
A0034513
1 Local operation via display module

2 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
3 Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
4 Field Xpert SMT70
5 Mobile handheld terminal
6 Control system (e.g. PLC)
Endress+Hauser 51
Operation options Proline Promag P 300 HART
8.2 Structure and function of the operating menu
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document supplied with the device →  197
Operating menu for operators and maintenances

Language !
Operatation Language
Parameter 1
Operator
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup Device tag
Wizard 1 / Parameter 1
Maintenance
Task-oriented
Wizard n / Parameter n
Advanced setup Enter access code
Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Operating menu for experts

Expert Access status display
Parameter n
System
Function-oriented
Sensor
Expert
Input
Output
Communication
Application
Diagnostics
A0018237-EN
 20 Schematic structure of the operating menu
52 Endress+Hauser
8.2.2 Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter User role and tasks Content/meaning
Language task-oriented Role "Operator", "Maintenance" • Defining the operating language

Tasks during operation: • Defining the Web server operating language
• Configuration of the operational • Resetting and controlling totalizers
display
Operation • Reading measured values • Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)
• Resetting and controlling totalizers
Setup "Maintenance" role Wizards for fast commissioning:

Commissioning: • Configuration of the system units
• Configuration of the • Displaying the I/O configuration
measurement • Configuration of the inputs
• Configuration of the inputs and • Configuration of the outputs
outputs • Configuration of the operational display
• Configuration of the • Configuration of the low flow cut off
communication interface • Configuration of empty pipe detection
Advanced setup
• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)
• Configuration of totalizers
• Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional)
• Configuration of WLAN settings
• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics "Maintenance" role Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
Troubleshooting: errors:
• Diagnostics and elimination of • Diagnostic list
process and device errors Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Measured value simulation • Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Data logging submenu with the "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values
• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.
Expert function-oriented Tasks that require detailed Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to access
knowledge of the function of the these parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu is
device: based on the function blocks of the device:
• Commissioning measurements • System
under difficult conditions Contains all higher-level device parameters that do not pertain either to
• Optimal adaptation of the the measurement or to measured value communication.
measurement to difficult • Sensor
conditions Configuration of the measurement.
• Detailed configuration of the • Input
communication interface Configuration of the status input.
• Error diagnostics in difficult cases • Output
Configuration of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Application
Configuration of the functions that go beyond the actual measurement
(e.g. totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.
Endress+Hauser 53
8.3 Access to the operating menu via the local display
8.3.1 Operational display
2 XXXXXXXXX F 3
4 1120.50
l/h
A0029346
1 Operational display
2 Device tag →  84
3 Status area
4 Display area for measured values (4-line)
5 Operating elements →  59
Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:
• Status signals→  141
• F: Failure
• C: Function check
• S: Out of specification
• M: Maintenance required
• Diagnostic behavior→  142
• : Alarm
• : Warning
• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )
• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured variable Measurement channel Diagnostic behavior

number
↓ ↓ ↓
Example
Appears only if a diagnostics

event is present for this
measured variable.
Measured variables
Symbol Meaning
Volume flow
Conductivity
54 Endress+Hauser
Mass flow
Totalizer
 displayed.
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is
Output
 The measurement channel number indicates which of the outputs is displayed.

Status input
Measurement channel numbers

Symbol Meaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4
The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).
Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  142
The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via the
Format display parameter (→  99).
8.3.2 Navigation view
In the submenu In the wizard
1 1
2 /../Operation 0091-1 3 2 /../Curr. output 1 S 3

Access stat.disp Assign curr.
Operator Volume flow
Locking status 4
Display 4
5 5
A0013993-EN A0016327-EN
1 Navigation view
2 Navigation path to current position
3 Status area
4 Display area for navigation
5 Operating elements →  59
Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of the
following elements:
• In the submenu: Omission symbol for Name of current

Display symbol for menu operating menu levels in • Submenu
• In the wizard: between • Wizard
Display symbol for wizard • Parameters
↓ ↓ ↓
Examples / ../ Display
Endress+Hauser 55
/ ../ Display
For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section
→  56
Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:
• In the submenu
• The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)
• If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal
• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  141
• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  61
Display area
Menus
Symbol Meaning
Operation
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
Expert
Appears:
• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection
• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu
Submenus, wizards, parameters

Symbol Meaning
Submenu
Wizard
Parameters within a wizard
 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.

Locking
Symbol Meaning
Parameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch
56 Endress+Hauser
Wizard operation
Symbol Meaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
8.3.3 Editing view
Numeric editor
1 +0.000 Xx
0 1 2 3 4
2 5 6 7 8 9
+ –
3
A0034250
 21 For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

1 Entry display area
2 Input screen
3 Confirm, delete or reject entry
4 Operating elements
Text editor
1 Xxxxxxx
A B C D E F G H I J K
2 L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z 6
3 7
5
4
A0034114
 22 For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

1 Entry display area
2 Current input screen
3 Change input screen
5 Move entry position
6 Delete entry
7 Reject or confirm entry
Endress+Hauser 57
Using the operating elements in the editing view
Key Meaning
Minus key
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
• Pressing the key briefly confirms the selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.
+ Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

Close the editing view without accepting a change.
Input screens
Symbol Meaning
Upper case
Lower case
Numbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }
Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _
Umlauts and accents
Controlling data entries
Symbol Meaning
Move entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered
58 Endress+Hauser
8.3.4 Operating elements
Key Meaning
Minus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
For text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
• Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
• Starts the wizard.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s in a parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
• Pressing the key briefly confirms the selection.
• Pressing the key for 2 s confirms your entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)

In menu, submenu
• Pressing the key briefly:
• Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next level up.
• If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
+
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").
With a wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next level up.
Closes the editing view without applying changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press and hold down the keys simultaneously)
• If the keypad lock is enabled:
+ Pressing the key for 3 s disables the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not enabled:
Pressing the key for 3 s opens the context menu including the selection for activating
the keypad lock.
8.3.5 Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly from
the operational display:
• Setup
• Data backup
• Simulation
Endress+Hauser 59
Calling up and closing the context menu

The user is in the operational display.
1. Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on
l/h
A0034608-EN
2. Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.
Calling up the menu via the context menu

1. Open the context menu.
2. Press  to navigate to the desired menu.
3. Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.
60 Endress+Hauser
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of the
individual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements
→  55
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
Main menu 0104-1
Language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Language
2. Display/operat.
Setup
/ ../Display/operat. 0091-1
Access stat.disp
3. Operator
Locking status
Display
/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
4. Display
/ ../Display 0098-1
Format display
5. 1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
6. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
/ ../Format display 0098-1
1 value, max.
7. Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.
XXXXXXXXX
10.50
8. 2s mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN
8.3.7 Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access
Endress+Hauser 61
The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2 1
A0029414
1 Direct access code
Note the following when entering the direct access code:

• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"
• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is opened automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter
• If a different channel is opened: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device
8.3.8 Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text

The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1. Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code

Enter access code to disable
write protec.
A0014002-EN
 23 Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"
 The help text is closed.
8.3.9 Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.
62 Endress+Hauser
Ent. access code

Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN
For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor
- with symbols →  57, for a description of the operating elements →  59
8.3.10 User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to the
parameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  124.
Defining access authorization for user roles

An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Access
authorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the
"Maintenance" user role.
‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role

Access code status Read access Write access
An access code has not yet been defined

 
(factory setting).
1)
After an access code has been defined.  
1) The user only has write access after entering the access code.
Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role

Access code status Read access Write access
After an access code has been defined.  – 1)
1) Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excluded from
the write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
section
The user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Access
status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter is
write-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  124.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specific
access code in the Enter access code parameter (→  110) via the respective access
option.
1. After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.
Endress+Hauser 63
2. Enter the access code.

 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously write-
protected parameters are now re-enabled.
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypad lock

The keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu or
change the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lock

The keypad lock is switched on automatically:
• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:

1. The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.
2. In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, the
Keylock on message appears.
Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.
8.4 Access to the operating menu via the Web browser
8.4.1 Function scope

Thanks to the integrated Web server the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via the WLAN interface. The structure
of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured
values, device status information is also displayed and allows users to monitor the status of
the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can
be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation for
the device
64 Endress+Hauser
8.4.2 Requirements
Computer hardware
Hardware Interface
CDI-RJ45 WLAN
Interface The computer must have an RJ45 The operating unit must have a
interface. WLAN interface.
Connection Ethernet cable with RJ45 connector. Connection via Wireless LAN.
Screen Recommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)
Computer software
Software Interface
CDI-RJ45 WLAN
Recommended operating • Microsoft Windows 8 or higher.

systems • Mobile operating systems:
• iOS
• Android
 Microsoft Windows XP is supported.

 Microsoft Windows 7 is supported.
Web browsers supported • Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher
• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox
• Google Chrome
• Safari
Computer settings
Settings Interface
CDI-RJ45 WLAN
User rights Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).
Proxy server settings of the The Web browser setting Use proxy server for LAN must be disabled .
Web browser
JavaScript JavaScript must be enabled.
 IfEnter
JavaScript cannot be enabled:
http://192.168.1.212/servlet/basic.html in the address bar of the
web browser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating
menu structure starts in the Web browser.
 When installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display,

clear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.
Network connections Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN. connections.
In the event of connection problems: →  138
Endress+Hauser 65
Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface

Device CDI-RJ45 service interface
Measuring device The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.
Web server Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON
 For information on enabling the Web server →  70
Measuring device: via WLAN interface

Device WLAN interface
Measuring device The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:

• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
Web server Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON
 For information on enabling the Web server →  70
8.4.3 Establishing a connection
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Preparing the measuring device
1. Depending on the housing version:
Loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the housing cover.
2. Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.
3. The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and the
communication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 plug via the standard Ethernet connecting cable .
Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer

The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)
1. Switch on the measuring device.

2. Connect to the computer using a cable →  72.
3. If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,
Internet or Windows Explorer.
4. Close any open Internet browsers.
5. Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:
IP address 192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty
66 Endress+Hauser
Via WLAN interface

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with a web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.
Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser

1. Start the Web browser on the computer.
Endress+Hauser 67
2. Enter the IP address of the web server in the address line of the web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1 2 3 4 5
7
8
10
A0029417
1 Picture of device
2 Device name
3 Device tag (→  84)
4 Status signal
5 Current measured values
6 Operating language
7 User role
8 Access code
9 Login
10 Reset access code (→  121)
If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  138
8.4.4 Logging on
1. Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.
2. Enter the user-specific access code.
3. Press OK to confirm your entry.
Access code 0000 (default setting); can be changed by customer
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.
68 Endress+Hauser
8.4.5 User interface
1
2
A0029418
1 Function row
2 Local display language
3 Navigation area
Header
The following information appears in the header:
• Device name
• Device tag
• Device status with status signal →  144
• Current measured values
Function row
Functions Meaning
Measured values Displays the measured values of the device
• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device

• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
Menu
 For detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
Instructions for the measuring device
Device status Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority
Data exchange between PC and measuring device:

• Device configuration:
• Load settings from the device
(XML format, save configuration)
• Save settings to the device
(XML format, restore configuration)
Data
• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)
management
• Documents - Export documents:
• Export backup data record
(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)
• Verification report
(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)
• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version
Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection
Network to the measuring device:
configuration • Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)
• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)
Logout End the operation and call up the login page
Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in the
navigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Endress+Hauser 69
Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:
• Configuring parameters
• Reading measured values
• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter Description Selection Factory setting
Web server functionality Switch the Web server on and off. • Off On
• HTML Off
• On
Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
Option Description
Off • The Web server is completely disabled.

• Port 80 is locked.
HTML Off The HTML version of the Web server is not available.
On • The complete Web server functionality is available.

• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.
Enabling the Web server

If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:
• Via local display
• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool
8.4.7 Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function
(upload configuration from device) if necessary.
1. Select the Logout entry in the function row.

 The home page with the Login box appears.
2. Close the Web browser.
3. If no longer needed:
Reset the modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  66.
70 Endress+Hauser
8.5 Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool
Via HART protocol

This communication interface is available in device versions with a HART output.
4 7
1 2 3 5 6
A0028747
 24 Options for remote operation via HART protocol (active)

2 Field Communicator 475
3 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM
DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
4 Commubox FXA195 (USB)
6 Field Xpert SMT70
7 VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
8 Transmitter
Endress+Hauser 71
10
2 3 6 9
1 4 5 7 8
A0028746
 25 Options for remote operation via HART protocol (passive)

2 Transmitter power supply unit, e.g. RN221N (with communication resistor)
3 Connection for Commubox FXA195 and Field Communicator 475
4 Field Communicator 475
5 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) for accessing the integrated device Web server or
computer with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM) with COM
DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
6 Commubox FXA195 (USB)
8 Field Xpert SMT70
9 VIATOR Bluetooth modem with connecting cable
10 Transmitter
Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established via onsite device configuration. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 to the M12 plug is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 plug mounted in the
cable entry. The connection to the service interface can be established via an M12
plug without opening the device.
A0027563
 26 Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

1 Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
2 Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 plug
3 Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server
72 Endress+Hauser
Via WLAN interface

The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch control + WLAN"
3 4 1 2 3 4
5 6 7
A0034570
1 Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna

2 Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
3 LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
4 LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
5 Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for
accessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
6 Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
7 Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)
Function WLAN: IEEE 802.11 b/g (2.4 GHz)
Encryption WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)
Configurable WLAN channels 1 to 11
Degree of protection IP67
Available antennas • Internal antenna

• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place of
installation.
 Only 1 antenna is active at any one time!

Range • Internal antenna: typically 10 m (32 ft)
• External antenna: typically 50 m (164 ft)
Materials (external antenna) • Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-
plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Plug: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal

NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
Endress+Hauser 73
NOTICE
In principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal

‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1. In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).
2. If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.
3. Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with a web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.
Disconnecting
‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
8.5.2 Field Xpert SFX350, SFX370
Function range
Field Xpert SFX350 and Field Xpert SFX370 are mobile computers for commissioning and
maintenance. They enable efficient device configuration and diagnostics for HART and
FOUNDATION Fieldbus devices in the non-hazardous area (SFX350, SFX370) and
hazardous area (SFX370).
For details, see Operating Instructions BA01202S
Source for device description files

See information →  78
8.5.3 FieldCare
Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it is
also a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
74 Endress+Hauser
Access is via:
• HART protocol
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  72
• WLAN interface →  73
Typical functions:
• Parameterization of transmitters
• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)
• Documentation of the measuring point
• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S

Establishing a connection
1. Start FieldCare and launch the project.
2. In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.
3. Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.
4. Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in the
context menu that opens.
5. Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.
6. Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter to
confirm.
7. Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
Endress+Hauser 75
User interface
2 3 4 5 6 7
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx
1 Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status: Good
Xxxxxx Mass flow unit: kg/h

PAccess status tooling Maintenance Volume flow unit: m³/h
+ Operation
– Setup
PDevice tag Xxxxxx
– System units
P Mass flow unit kg/h
8 P Volume flow unit m³/h
9
+ Select medium
+ …
+ …
+ Advanced setup
+ Diagnostics
+ Expert
10 11
A0021051-EN
1 Header
2 Picture of device
3 Device name
4 Tag name
5 Status area with status signal →  144
6 Display area for current measured values
7 Edit bar with additional functions such as save/load, event list and document creation
8 Navigation area with operating menu structure
9 Working area
10 Range of action
11 Status area
8.5.4 DeviceCare
Function scope
Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated
"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,
comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S

8.5.5 AMS Device Manager
Function scope
Program from Emerson Process Management for operating and configuring measuring
devices via HART protocol.
76 Endress+Hauser

See data →  78
8.5.6 SIMATIC PDM
Function scope
SIMATIC PDM is a standardized, manufacturer-independent program from Siemens for
the operation, configuration, maintenance and diagnosis of intelligent field devices via
HART protocol.

See information on →  78
8.5.7 Field Communicator 475
Function scope
Industrial handheld terminal from Emerson Process Management for remote
configuration and measured value display via HART protocol.

See data →  78
Endress+Hauser 77
System integration Proline Promag P 300 HART
9 System integration
9.1 Overview of device description files
9.1.1 Current version data for the device
Firmware version 01.06.zz • On the title page of the Operating Instructions

• On the transmitter nameplate
• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
version
Release date of firmware version 08.2022 ---
Manufacturer ID 0x11 Manufacturer ID

Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID
Device type ID 0x3C Device type

Diagnostics → Device information → Device type
HART protocol revision 7 HART revision

Expert → Communication → HART output
→ Information → HART revision
Device revision 1 • On the transmitter nameplate

• Device revision
Diagnostics → Device information → Device revision
For an overview of the various firmware versions for the device →  157
9.1.2 Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the table
below, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via Sources for obtaining device descriptions

HART protocol
FieldCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)
DeviceCare • www.endress.com → Download Area

• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)
• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)
• Field Xpert SMT70 Use update function of handheld terminal

• Field Xpert SMT77
AMS Device Manager www.endress.com → Download Area

(Emerson Process Management)
SIMATIC PDM www.endress.com → Download Area

(Siemens)
Field Communicator 475 Use update function of handheld terminal

(Emerson Process Management)
9.2 Measured variables via HART protocol

The following measured variables (HART device variables) are assigned to the dynamic
variables at the factory:
78 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART System integration
Dynamic variables Measured variables

(HART device variables)
Primary dynamic variable (PV) Volume flow
Secondary dynamic variable (SV) Totalizer 1
Tertiary dynamic variable (TV) Totalizer 2
Quaternary dynamic variable (QV) Totalizer 3
The assignment of the measured variables to the dynamic variables can be modified and
assigned as desired via local operation and the operating tool using the following
parameters:
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign PV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign SV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign TV
• Expert → Communication → HART output → Output → Assign QV
The following measured variables can be assigned to the dynamic variables:
Measured variables for PV (primary dynamic variable)
• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity 1)
• Electronics temperature
Measured variables for SV, TV, QV (secondary, tertiary and quaternary dynamic
variable)
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity 2)
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
The range of options increases if the measuring device has one or more application
packages.
Device variables
The device variables are permanently assigned. A maximum of 8 device variables can be
transmitted:
• 0 = volume flow
• 1 = mass flow
• 2 = corrected volume flow
• 3 = flow velocity
• 4 = conductivity
• 7 = electronic temperature
• 8 = totalizer 1
• 9 = totalizer 2
• 10 = totalizer 3
1) Visibility depends on order options or device settings

2) Visibility depends on order options or device settings
Endress+Hauser 79
System integration Proline Promag P 300 HART
9.3 Other settings

Burst mode functionality in accordance with HART 7 Specification:
Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → HART output → Burst configuration → Burst
configuration 1 to n
‣ Burst configuration 1 to n
Burst mode 1 to n →  80
Burst command 1 to n →  80
Burst variable 0 →  81
Burst trigger mode →  81
Burst trigger level →  81
Min. update period →  81
Max. update period →  81
Parameter Description Selection / User entry Factory setting
Burst mode 1 to n Activate the HART burst mode for burst • Off Off
message X. • On
Burst command 1 to n Select the HART command that is sent to the • Command 1 Command 2
HART master. • Command 2
• Command 3
• Command 9
• Command 33
• Command 48
80 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART System integration
Parameter Description Selection / User entry Factory setting
Burst variable 0 For HART command 9 and 33: select the • Volume flow Volume flow
HART device variable or the process variable. • Mass flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
• HBSI *
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Density
• HART input
• Percent of range
• Measured current
• Primary variable (PV)
• Secondary variable (SV)
• Tertiary variable (TV)
• Quaternary variable (QV)
• Not used
Burst variable 1 For HART command 9 and 33: select the See the Burst variable 0 Not used
HART device variable or the process variable. parameter.
Burst variable 4 For HART command 9: select the HART See the Burst variable 0 Not used
device variable or the process variable. parameter.
Burst trigger mode Select the event that triggers burst message • Continuous Continuous
X. • Window *
• Rising *
• Falling *
• On change
Burst trigger level Enter the burst trigger value. Signed floating-point number –
Together with the option selected in the
Burst trigger mode parameter the burst
trigger value determines the time of burst
message X.
Min. update period Enter the minimum time span between two Positive integer 1 000 ms
burst commands of burst message X.
Max. update period Enter the maximum time span between two Positive integer 2 000 ms
burst commands of burst message X.
* Visibility depends on order options or device settings
Endress+Hauser 81
Commissioning Proline Promag P 300 HART
10 Commissioning
10.1 Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:
‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• Checklist for "Post-mounting check" →  34
• Checklist for "Post-connection check" →  50
10.2 Switching on the measuring device

‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer to

the section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  137.
10.3 Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX XX
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Operation
Setup
Display language 0104-1
2. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Display language 0104-1
3. Ã English
Deutsch
Español
Français
Hauptmenü 0104-1
4. Sprache
Deutsch
Betrieb
Setup
A0029420
 27 Taking the example of the local display
10.4 Configuring the measuring device

• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
82 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Commissioning
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
Display language
1. English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
2. Setup
Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
Medium selection
3.
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
 Setup
Device tag →  84
‣ System units →  84
‣ I/O configuration →  86
‣ Current input 1 to n →  87
‣ Status input 1 to n →  87
‣ Current output 1 to n →  89
‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  92
1 to n
‣ Relay output 1 to n →  104
‣ Double pulse output →  105
‣ Display →  98
‣ Low flow cut off →  100
‣ Empty pipe detection →  101
Endress+Hauser 83
‣ Configure flow damping →  106
‣ Advanced setup →  109
10.4.1 Defining the tag name

To enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter a
unique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1 XXXXXXXXX
A0029422
 29 Header of the operational display with tag name

1 Tag name
Enter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  76
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Device tag
Parameter Description User entry Factory setting
Device tag Enter the name for the measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promag
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).
10.4.2 Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version.
Certain submenus and parameters in these submenus are not described in the
Operation Instructions. Instead a description is provided in the Special Documentation
for the device (→ "Supplementary documentation" section).
Navigation
"Setup" menu → System units
‣ System units
Volume flow unit →  85
Volume unit →  85
Conductivity unit →  85
Temperature unit →  85
84 Endress+Hauser
Mass flow unit →  85
Mass unit →  85
Density unit →  85
Corrected volume flow unit →  86
Corrected volume unit →  86
Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection Factory setting
Volume flow unit – Select volume flow unit. Unit choose list Depends on country:
• l/h
Effect
• gal/min (us)
The selected unit applies for:
• Output
• Low flow cut off
• Simulation process variable
Volume unit – Select volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• m³
• gal (us)
Conductivity unit The On option is selected in Select conductivity unit. Unit choose list µS/cm
the Conductivity Effect
measurement parameter
parameter. The selected unit applies for:
• Current output
• Frequency output
• Switch output
Temperature unit – Select temperature unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• °C
Effect
• °F
• Temperature parameter
• Maximum value parameter
• Minimum value parameter
• External temperature
parameter
• Maximum value parameter
• Minimum value parameter
Mass flow unit – Select mass flow unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• kg/h
Effect
• lb/min
• Output
Mass unit – Select mass unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg
• lb
Density unit – Select density unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:

• kg/l
Effect
• lb/ft³
• Output
Endress+Hauser 85
Corrected volume flow unit – Select corrected volume flow Unit choose list Country-specific:
unit. • Nl/h
• Sft³/h
Result
Corrected volume flow
parameter (→  128)
Corrected volume unit – Select corrected volume unit. Unit choose list Country-specific:
• Nm³
• Sft³
10.4.3 Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
in which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → I/O configuration
‣ I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers →  86
I/O module 1 to n information →  86
I/O module 1 to n type →  86
Apply I/O configuration →  87
I/O alteration code →  87
Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used –
module. • 26-27 (I/O 1)
• 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)
I/O module 1 to n information Shows information of the plugged I/O • Not plugged –
module. • Invalid
• Not configurable
• Configurable
• HART
I/O module 1 to n type Shows the I/O module type. • Off Off
• Current output *
• Current input *
• Status input *
• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *
• Double pulse output *
• Relay output *
86 Endress+Hauser
Parameter Description User interface / Selection / Factory setting

User entry
Apply I/O configuration Apply parameterization of the freely • No No

configurable I/O module. • Yes
I/O alteration code Enter the code in order to change the I/O Positive integer 0
configuration.
10.4.4 Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Status input 1 to n
‣ Status input 1 to n
Assign status input →  87
Terminal number →  87
Active level →  87
Response time status input →  87
Parameter Description Selection / User interface / Factory setting

User entry
Assign status input Select function for the status input. • Off Off
• Reset totalizer 1
• Reset all totalizers
• Flow override
Terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
status input module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)
Active level Define input signal level at which the • High High
assigned function is triggered. • Low
Response time status input Define the minimum amount of time the 5 to 200 ms 50 ms
input signal level must be present before the
selected function is triggered.
10.4.5 Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the current input.
Endress+Hauser 87
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current input
‣ Current input 1 to n
Signal mode →  88
0/4 mA value →  88
20 mA value →  88
Current span →  88
Failure mode →  88
Failure value →  88
Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface / Factory setting

Selection / User
entry
Terminal number – Shows the terminal numbers • Not used –

used by the current input • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)
Signal mode The measuring device is not Select the signal mode for the • Passive Active
approved for use in the current input. • Active *
hazardous area with type of
protection Ex-i.
0/4 mA value – Enter 4 mA value. Signed floating-point 0

number
20 mA value – Enter 20 mA value. Signed floating-point Depends on country

number and nominal
diameter
Current span – Select current range for • 4...20 mA (4... Country-specific:

process value output and 20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA NE
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5 mA)
signal. (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8 mA)
(3.9...20.8 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)
Failure mode – Define input behavior in alarm • Alarm Alarm

condition. • Last valid value
• Defined value
Failure value In the Failure mode Enter value to be used by the Signed floating-point 0
parameter, the Defined value device if input value from number
option is selected. external device is missing.
88 Endress+Hauser
10.4.6 Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that have
to be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Current output
‣ Current output 1 to n
Process variable current output →  90
Current range output →  90
Lower range value output →  90
Upper range value output →  90
Fixed current →  90
Damping current output →  90
Failure behavior current output →  91
Failure current →  91

Selection / User
entry

used by the current output • 26-27 (I/O 1)
module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)
Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Active * Active
current output. • Passive *
Endress+Hauser 89

Selection / User
entry
Process variable current output – Select the process variable for • Off Volume flow
the current output. • Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
• Electronics
temperature
• Noise *
• Coil current shot
time *
• Reference
electrode potential
against PE *
• HBSI *
• Build-up index *
• Test point 1
• Test point 2
• Test point 3
Current range output – Select current range for • 4...20 mA NE Depends on country:
process value output and (3.8...20.5 mA) • 4...20 mA NE
upper/lower level for alarm • 4...20 mA US (3.8...20.5 mA)
signal. (3.9...20.8 mA) • 4...20 mA US
• 4...20 mA (4... (3.9...20.8 mA)
20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0...
20.5 mA)
• Fixed value
Lower range value output One of the following options is Enter lower range value for the Signed floating-point Depends on country:
selected in the Current span measured value range. number • 0 l/h
parameter (→  90): • 0 gal/min (us)
• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)
Upper range value output One of the following options is Enter upper range value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
selected in the Current span the measured value range. number and nominal
parameter (→  90): diameter
• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)
Fixed current The Fixed current option is Defines the fixed output 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Current span current.
parameter (→  90).
Damping current output A process variable is selected Set reaction time for output 0.0 to 999.9 s 1.0 s
in the Assign current output signal to fluctuations in the
parameter (→  90) and one measured value.
of the following options is
selected in the Current span
parameter (→  90):
• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)
90 Endress+Hauser

Selection / User
entry
Failure behavior current output A process variable is selected Define output behavior in • Min. Max.
in the Assign current output alarm condition. • Max.
parameter (→  90) and one • Last valid value
of the following options is • Actual value
selected in the Current span • Fixed value
parameter (→  90):
• 4...20 mA NE (3.8...20.5
mA)
• 4...20 mA US (3.9...20.8
mA)
• 4...20 mA (4... 20.5 mA)
• 0...20 mA (0... 20.5 mA)
Failure current The Defined value option is Enter current output value in 0 to 22.5 mA 22.5 mA
selected in the Failure mode alarm condition.
parameter.
Endress+Hauser 91
10.4.7 Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all the
parameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output
‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n
Operating mode →  92
Operating mode Define the output as a pulse, frequency or • Pulse Pulse

switch output. • Frequency
• Switch
Configuring the pulse output
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n
Assign pulse output →  93
Pulse scaling →  93
Pulse width →  93
Invert output signal →  93
92 Endress+Hauser
Parameter Prerequisite Description Selection / User Factory setting

interface / User
entry
Operating mode – Define the output as a pulse, • Pulse Pulse

frequency or switch output. • Frequency
• Switch

used by the PFS output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)
Signal mode – Select the signal mode for the • Passive Passive
PFS output. • Active *
• Passive NE
Assign pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in Select process variable for • Off Off
the Operating mode pulse output. • Volume flow
parameter. • Mass flow
flow
Pulse scaling The Pulse option is selected in Enter quantity for measured Positive floating Depends on country
the Operating mode value at which a pulse is point number and nominal
parameter (→  92) and a output. diameter
process variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
Pulse width The Pulse option is selected in Define time width of the 0.05 to 2 000 ms 100 ms
the Operating mode output pulse.
parameter (→  92) and a
Failure mode The Pulse option is selected in Define output behavior in • Actual value No pulses
the Operating mode alarm condition. • No pulses
parameter (→  92) and a
Invert output signal – Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes
Configuring the frequency output
Navigation
1 to n
Assign frequency output →  94
Endress+Hauser 93
Minimum frequency value →  94
Maximum frequency value →  95
Measuring value at minimum →  95

frequency
Measuring value at maximum →  95

frequency
Failure frequency →  95

interface / User
entry

• Switch

module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)
• Passive NE
Assign frequency output In the Operating mode Select process variable for • Off Off
parameter (→  92), the frequency output. • Volume flow
Frequency option is selected. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
• Electronics
temperature
• Noise *
time *
• Reference
electrode potential
against PE *
• HBSI *
• Test point 1
• Test point 2
• Test point 3
Minimum frequency value The Frequency option is Enter minimum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  92)
and a process variable is
selected in the Assign
frequency output parameter
(→  94).
94 Endress+Hauser

interface / User
entry
Maximum frequency value The Frequency option is Enter maximum frequency. 0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz 10 000.0 Hz
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  92)
(→  94).
Measuring value at minimum The Frequency option is Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency selected in the Operating minimum frequency. number and nominal
mode parameter (→  92) diameter
(→  94).
Measuring value at maximum The Frequency option is Enter measured value for Signed floating-point Depends on country
frequency selected in the Operating maximum frequency. number and nominal
mode parameter (→  92) diameter
(→  94).
Failure mode The Frequency option is Define output behavior in • Actual value 0 Hz
selected in the Operating alarm condition. • Defined value
mode parameter (→  92) • 0 Hz
(→  94).
Failure frequency In the Operating mode Enter frequency output value 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
parameter (→  92), the in alarm condition.
Frequency option is selected,
in the Assign frequency
output parameter (→  94) a
process variable is selected,
and in the Failure mode
parameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

• Yes
Endress+Hauser 95
Configuring the switch output
Navigation
1 to n
Switch output function →  97
Assign diagnostic behavior →  97
Assign limit →  97
Assign flow direction check →  97
Assign status →  97
Switch-on value →  97
Switch-off value →  97
Switch-on delay →  97
Switch-off delay →  98

interface / User
entry

• Switch

module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)
• Passive NE
96 Endress+Hauser

interface / User
entry
Switch output function The Switch option is selected Select function for switch • Off Off
in the Operating mode output. • On
parameter. • Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Status
Assign diagnostic behavior • In the Operating mode Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Switch switch output. • Alarm or warning
option is selected. • Warning
• In the Switch output
function parameter, the
Diagnostic behavior option
is selected.
Assign limit • In the Operating mode Select process variable for limit • Off Volume flow
parameter, the Switch function. • Volume flow
option is selected. • Mass flow
• In the Switch output • Corrected volume
function parameter, the flow
Limit option is selected. • Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Electronics
temperature
Assign flow direction check • The Switch option is Select process variable for flow • Off Volume flow
selected in the Operating direction monitoring. • Volume flow
mode parameter. • Mass flow
• The Flow direction check • Corrected volume
option is selected in the flow
Switch output function
parameter.
Assign status • The Switch option is Select device status for switch • Empty pipe Empty pipe detection
selected in the Operating output. detection
mode parameter. • Low flow cut off
• The Status option is • Build-up index *
selected in the Switch • HBSI limit
output function parameter. exceeded *
Switch-on value • The Switch option is Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Operating switch-on point. number • 0 l/h
mode parameter. • 0 gal/min (us)
• The Limit option is selected
in the Switch output
function parameter.
Switch-off value • The Switch option is Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
selected in the Operating switch-off point. number • 0 l/h
mode parameter. • 0 gal/min (us)
function parameter.
Switch-on delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
function parameter.
Endress+Hauser 97

interface / User
entry
Switch-off delay • The Switch option is Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
selected in the Operating of status output.
mode parameter.
function parameter.
Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed

• Yes
10.4.8 Configuring the local display

The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that can
configured for configuring the local display.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Display
‣ Display
Format display →  99
Value 1 display →  99
0% bargraph value 1 →  99
98 Endress+Hauser

entry
Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values
Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Volume flow Volume flow
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Current output 1
• Current output 2 *
• Electronics
temperature
• HBSI *
• Noise *
time *
• Reference
electrode potential
against PE *
• Test point 1
• Test point 2
• Test point 3
0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 l/h
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter
Value 2 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that For the picklist, see None
is shown on the local display. the Value 1 display
0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
Value 3 display parameter. display. number • 0 l/h
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Value 3 display parameter. graph display. number
Endress+Hauser 99

entry
10.4.9 Configuring the low flow cut off

The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off
‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable →  100
On value low flow cutoff →  100
Off value low flow cutoff →  100
Pressure shock suppression →  100

entry
Assign process variable – Select process variable for low • Off Volume flow
flow cut off. • Volume flow
• Mass flow
flow
On value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter on value for low flow cut Positive floating- Depends on country
in the Assign process variable off. point number and nominal
parameter (→  100). diameter
Off value low flow cutoff A process variable is selected Enter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 % 50 %
in the Assign process variable off.
Pressure shock suppression A process variable is selected Enter time frame for signal 0 to 100 s 0s
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  100). shock suppression).
100 Endress+Hauser
10.4.10 Configuring empty pipe detection

The measuring devices are calibrated with water (approx. 500 µS/cm) at the factory.
For liquids with a lower conductivity, it is advisable to perform a new full pipe
adjustment onsite.
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for the
configuration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection
‣ Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection →  101
New adjustment →  101
Progress →  101
Switch point empty pipe detection →  101
Response time empty pipe detection →  101

interface / User
entry
Empty pipe detection – Switch empty pipe detection on • Off Off

and off. • On
New adjustment The On option is selected in Select type of adjustment. • Cancel Cancel
the Empty pipe detection • Empty pipe adjust
parameter. • Full pipe adjust
Progress The On option is selected in Shows the progress. • Ok –

the Empty pipe detection • Busy
parameter. • Not ok
Switch point empty pipe detection The On option is selected in Enter the switch point in % of 0 to 100 % 50 %
the Empty pipe detection the difference between the two
parameter. adjustment values. The lower
the percentage, the earlier the
pipe is detected as empty.
Response time empty pipe detection A process variable is selected Use this function to enter the 0 to 100 s 1s
in the Assign process variable minimum time (hold time) the
parameter (→  101). signal must be present before
diagnostic message S962
"Empty pipe" is triggered in the
event of a partially filled or
empty measuring pipe.
10.4.11 Configuring the HART input
Endress+Hauser 101
Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → HART input
‣ HART input
‣ Configuration →  102
Capture mode →  102
Device ID →  102
Device type →  103
Manufacturer ID →  103
Burst command →  103
Slot number →  103
Timeout →  103
Failure value →  103
‣ Input →  103
Value →  103
Status →  103
"Configuration" submenu
Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → HART input → Configuration

entry
Capture mode – Select capture mode via burst • Off Off

or master communication. • Burst network
• Master network
Device ID The Master network option is Enter device ID of external 6-digit value: 0
selected in the Capture mode device. • Via local
parameter. operation: enter as
hexadecimal or
decimal number
• Via operating tool:
enter as decimal
number
102 Endress+Hauser

entry
Device type In the Capture mode Enter device type of external 2-digit hexadecimal 0x00
parameter, the Master device. number
network option is selected.
Manufacturer ID The Master network option is Enter manufacture ID of 2-digit value: 0

selected in the Capture mode external device. • Via local
parameter. operation: enter as
hexadecimal or
decimal number
• Via operating tool:
enter as decimal
number
Burst command The Burst network option or Select command to read in • Command 1 Command 1
the Master network option external process variable. • Command 3
are selected in the Capture • Command 9
mode parameter. • Command 33
Slot number The Burst network option or Define position of external 1 to 8 1

the Master network option is process variable in burst
selected in the Capture mode command.
parameter.
Timeout The Burst network option or Enter deadline for process 1 to 120 s 5s
the Master network option is variable of external device.
selected in the Capture mode
parameter.  Ifexceeded,
the waiting time is
the
F410 Data transfer
diagnostic message is
displayed.
Failure mode In the Capture mode Define behavior if external • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Burst network process variable is missed. • Last valid value
option or Master network • Defined value
option is selected.
Failure value The following conditions are Enter value to be used by the Signed floating-point 0
met: device if input value from number
• In the Capture mode external device is missing.
parameter, the Burst
network option or Master
network option is selected.
• In the Failure mode
parameter, the Defined
value option is selected.
"Input" submenu
Navigation
"Expert" menu → Communication → HART input → Input
Parameter Description User interface
Value Shows the value of the device variable recorded by the HART Signed floating-point number
input.
Status Shows the status of the device variable recorded by the HART • Manual/Fixed
input. • Good
• Poor accuracy
• Bad
Endress+Hauser 103
10.4.12 Configuring the relay output

The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters that
have to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n
‣ Relay output 1 to n
Relay output function →  104
Assign flow direction check →  104
Assign limit →  105
Assign diagnostic behavior →  105
Assign status →  105
Switch-off value →  105
Switch-off delay →  105
Switch-on value →  105
Switch-on delay →  105

Selection / User
entry

used by the relay output • 24-25 (I/O 2)
module. • 22-23 (I/O 3)
Relay output function – Select the function for the • Closed Closed
relay output. • Open
• Diagnostic
behavior
• Limit
• Flow direction
check
• Digital Output
Assign flow direction check The Flow direction check Select process variable for flow • Off Volume flow
option is selected in the Relay direction monitoring. • Volume flow
output function parameter. • Mass flow
flow
104 Endress+Hauser

Selection / User
entry
Assign limit The Limit option is selected in Select process variable for limit • Off Volume flow
the Relay output function function. • Volume flow
parameter. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Electronics
temperature
Assign diagnostic behavior In the Relay output function Select diagnostic behavior for • Alarm Alarm
parameter, the Diagnostic switch output. • Alarm or warning
behavior option is selected. • Warning
Assign status In the Relay output function Select device status for switch • Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
parameter, the Digital Output output. detection detection
option is selected. • Low flow cut off
• HBSI limit
exceeded *
Switch-off value In the Relay output function Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
parameter, the Limit option is switch-off point. number • 0 l/h
selected. • 0 gal(us)/min
Switch-off delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-off 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.
Switch-on value The Limit option is selected in Enter measured value for the Signed floating-point Country-specific:
the Relay output function switch-on point. number • 0 l/h
parameter. • 0 gal(us)/min
Switch-on delay In the Relay output function Define delay for the switch-on 0.0 to 100.0 s 0.0 s
parameter, the Limit option is of status output.
selected.
Failure mode – Define output behavior in • Actual status Open

alarm condition. • Open
• Closed
10.4.13 Configuring the double pulse output

The Double pulse output submenu guides the user systematically through all the
parameters that have to be set for configuring the double pulse output.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Double pulse output
‣ Double pulse output
Master terminal number →  106
Assign pulse output →  106
Endress+Hauser 105
Measuring mode →  106
Value per pulse →  106
Pulse width →  106
Parameter Description Selection / User interface / Factory setting

User entry
Signal mode Select the signal mode for the double pulse • Passive Passive
output. • Active *
• Passive NE
Master terminal number Shows the terminal numbers used by the • Not used –
master of the double pulse output module. • 24-25 (I/O 2)
• 22-23 (I/O 3)
Assign pulse output Select process variable for pulse output. • Off Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
Measuring mode Select measuring mode for pulse output. • Forward flow Forward flow
• Forward/Reverse flow
• Reverse flow
• Reverse flow compensation
Value per pulse Enter measured value at which a pulse is Signed floating-point number Depends on country and
output. nominal diameter
Pulse width Define time width of the output pulse. 0.5 to 2 000 ms 0.5 ms
Failure mode Define output behavior in alarm condition. • Actual value No pulses
• No pulses
Invert output signal Invert the output signal. • No No

• Yes
10.4.14 Configuring flow damping

The Configure flow damping wizard guides the user systematically through the
parameters, depending on the selected scenario:
• Configuration of damping for the application
To configure flow damping for the specific requirements of the process application.
• Replace old device
To adopt the flow damping for the new device in the event of a device replacement.
• Restoring factory settings
To restore the factory settings of all the parameters that are relevant for flow damping.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Configure flow damping
‣ Configure flow damping
106 Endress+Hauser
Scenario →  107
Old device →  107
CIP filter on →  107
Damping level →  107
Flow change rate →  107
Application →  107
Pulsating flow →  108
Flow peaks →  108
Damping level →  107
Filter options →  108
Median filter depth →  108
Flow damping →  108
Support ID →  108
Save settings →  108
Parameter Description Selection / User interface Factory setting
Scenario Select the applicable scenario. • Replace old device Configure damping for
• Configure damping for application
application
• Restore factory settings
Old device Select the measuring device to replace. • Promag 10 (pre-2021) Promag 50/53
• Promag 50/53
• Promag 55 H
CIP filter on Indicate whether the CIP filter was applied • No No

for the device to be replaced. • Yes
Damping level Select the degree of damping to apply. • Default Default

• Weak
• Strong
Flow change rate Select the rate at which the flow changes. • Once a day or less Once a minute or less
• Once an hour or less
• Once a minute or less
• Once a second or more
Application Select the type of application that applies. • Display flow Display flow
• Control loop
• Totalizing
• Batching
Endress+Hauser 107
Parameter Description Selection / User interface Factory setting
Pulsating flow Indicate whether the process is characterized • No No

by pulsating flow (e.g. due to a displacement • Yes
pump).
Flow peaks Select the frequency at which flow • Never Never

interference peaks occur. • Sporadically
• Regularly
• Continuously
Response Time • Fast Normal

• Slow
• Normal
Filter options Shows the type of flow filter recommended • Adaptive Binomial
for damping. • Adaptive CIP on
• Dynamic
• Dynamic CIP on
• Binomial
• Binomial CIP on
Median filter depth Shows median filter depth recommended for 0 to 255 6
damping.
Flow damping Shows the flow filter depth recommended 0 to 15 7

for damping.
Support ID If the recommended settings are not 0 to 65 535 0

satisfactory: please contact your Endress
+Hauser service organization with the
support ID displayed.
Save settings Indicate whether to save the recommended • Cancel Cancel

settings. • Save *
Filter Wizard result: • Completed Aborted

• Aborted
108 Endress+Hauser
10.5 Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu with its submenus contains parameters for specific
settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
mA
Main menu 0104-1
1. Display language
English
Display/operat.
Setup
Main menu
2. Display/operat.
Setup
Diagnostic
/ ../Setup
3. Medium selection
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
/ ../Setup
4. XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup
/ ../Advanced setup 0092-1

5. Ent. access code
Device tag
****
Def. access code
A0032223-EN
The number of submenus and parameters can vary depending on the device version
and the available application packages. These submenus and their parameters are
explained in the Special Documentation for the device and not in Operating
Instructions.
• For detailed information on the parameter descriptions for application packages:
Special Documentation for the device
• For detailed information on the SIL parameter descriptions, see the Functional
Safety Manual →  197
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
‣ Advanced setup
Enter access code →  110
‣ Sensor adjustment →  110
Endress+Hauser 109
‣ Totalizer 1 to n →  110
‣ Display →  112
‣ Electrode cleaning cycle →  116
‣ WLAN settings →  117
‣ Configuration backup →  118
‣ Administration →  120
10.5.1 Using the parameter to enter the access code

Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup
Parameter Description User entry
Enter access code Enter access code to disable write protection of parameters. Max. 16-digit character string comprising
numbers, letters and special characters
10.5.2 Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality of
the sensor.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment
‣ Sensor adjustment
Installation direction →  110
Installation direction Select sign of flow direction. • Forward flow Forward flow
• Reverse flow
10.5.3 Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
110 Endress+Hauser
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n
‣ Totalizer 1 to n
Assign process variable →  111
Unit totalizer 1 to n →  111
Totalizer operation mode →  111
Assign process variable – Select process variable for • Off Volume flow
totalizer. • Volume flow
• Mass flow
flow
Unit totalizer 1 to n A process variable is selected Select the unit for the process Unit choose list Depends on country:
in the Assign process variable variable of the totalizer. • l
parameter (→  111) of the • gal (us)
Totalizer 1 to n submenu.
Totalizer operation mode A process variable is selected Select totalizer calculation • Net Net
in the Assign process variable mode. • Forward
parameter (→  111) of the • Reverse
Failure mode A process variable is selected Select totalizer behavior in the • Hold Hold
in the Assign process variable event of a device alarm. • Continue
parameter (→  111) of the • Last valid value +
Totalizer 1 to n submenu. continue
Endress+Hauser 111
10.5.4 Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configuration
of the local display.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display
‣ Display
Format display →  113
Decimal places 1 →  113
Display language →  115
Display interval →  115
Display damping →  115
Header →  115
Header text →  115
Separator →  115
Backlight →  115
112 Endress+Hauser

entry
Format display A local display is provided. Select how measured values • 1 value, max. size 1 value, max. size
are shown on the display. • 1 bargraph + 1
value
• 2 values
• 1 value large + 2
values
• 4 values
Value 1 display A local display is provided. Select the measured value that • Volume flow Volume flow
is shown on the local display. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Totalizer 1
• Totalizer 2
• Totalizer 3
• Electronics
temperature
• HBSI *
• Noise *
time *
• Reference
electrode potential
against PE *
• Test point 1
• Test point 2
• Test point 3
0% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
display. number • 0 l/h
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 1 A local display is provided. Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point Depends on country
graph display. number and nominal
diameter
Decimal places 1 A measured value is specified Select the number of decimal • x x.xx
in the Value 1 display places for the display value. • x.x
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
0% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Country-specific:
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 3 A selection was made in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
Endress+Hauser 113

entry
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
0% bargraph value 5 An option was selected in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Depends on country:
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 5 An option was selected in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
• x.xxxxx
• x.xxxxxx
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
• x.xxxxx
• x.xxxxxx
0% bargraph value 7 An option was selected in the Enter 0% value for bar graph Signed floating-point Depends on country:
• 0 gal/min (us)
100% bargraph value 7 An option was selected in the Enter 100% value for bar Signed floating-point 0
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
• x.xxxxx
• x.xxxxxx
114 Endress+Hauser

entry
parameter. • x.xx
• x.xxx
• x.xxxx
• x.xxxxx
• x.xxxxxx
Display language A local display is provided. Set display language. • English English
• Deutsch (alternatively, the
• Français ordered language is
• Español preset in the device)
• Italiano
• Nederlands
• Portuguesa
• Polski
• русский язык
(Russian)
• Svenska
• Türkçe
• 中文 (Chinese)
• 日本語 (Japanese)
• 한국어 (Korean)
• tiếng Việt
(Vietnamese)
• čeština (Czech)
Display interval A local display is provided. Set time measured values are 1 to 10 s 5s
shown on display if display
alternates between values.
Display damping A local display is provided. Set display reaction time to 0.0 to 999.9 s 0.0 s
fluctuations in the measured
value.
Header A local display is provided. Select header contents on local • Device tag Device tag
display. • Free text
Header text The Free text option is Enter display header text. Max. 12 characters, ------------
selected in the Header such as letters,
parameter. numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,
%, /)
Separator A local display is provided. Select decimal separator for • . (point) . (point)
displaying numerical values. • , (comma)
Backlight One of the following Switch the local display • Disable Enable
conditions is met: backlight on and off. • Enable
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control
+WLAN"
operation", option O "Remote
display 4-line illuminated;
10m/30ft cable; touch
control"
Endress+Hauser 115
10.5.5 Performing electrode cleaning

The Electrode cleaning cycle submenu contains the parameters that must be set for the
configuration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning cycle
‣ Electrode cleaning cycle
Electrode cleaning cycle →  116
ECC duration →  116
ECC recovery time →  116
ECC interval →  116
ECC polarity →  116

entry / User
interface
Electrode cleaning cycle Bei folgendem Switch electrode cleaning on or • Off On

Bestellmerkmal: off. • On
"Anwendungspaket", Option EC
"ECC Elektrodenreinigung"
ECC duration For the following order code: Specify the duration of the 0.01 to 30 s 2s
"Application package", option cleaning phase of the cycle.
EC "ECC electrode cleaning" Diag. msg. no. 530 is displayed
until the cleaning phase and
recovery phase are complete.
ECC recovery time For the following order code: Specify the maximum 1 to 600 s 60 s
"Application package", option timespan after the cleaning
EC "ECC electrode cleaning" phase for recovery before
measurement resumes during
which the output signal values
are frozen.
ECC interval For the following order code: Specify the interval between 0.5 to 168 h 0.5 h
"Application package", option one cleaning cycle and the
EC "ECC electrode cleaning" next.
ECC polarity For the following order code: Select the polarity of the • Positive Depends on the
"Application package", option electrode cleaning circuit. • Negative electrode material:
EC "ECC electrode cleaning" • Tantalum:
Negative option
• Platinum, Alloy
C22, stainless
steel: Positive
option
116 Endress+Hauser
10.5.6 WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters
that have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN settings
‣ WLAN settings
WLAN →  117
WLAN mode →  117
SSID name →  117
Network security →  118
Security identification →  118
User name →  118
WLAN password →  118
WLAN IP address →  118
WLAN MAC address →  118
WLAN passphrase →  118
Assign SSID name →  118
SSID name →  118
Connection state →  118
Received signal strength →  118

entry / User
interface
WLAN – Switch WLAN on and off. • Disable Enable

• Enable
WLAN mode – Select WLAN mode. • WLAN access WLAN access point
point
• WLAN Client
SSID name The client is activated. Enter the user-defined SSID – –

name (max. 32 characters).
Endress+Hauser 117

entry / User
interface
Network security – Select the security type of the • Unsecured WPA2-PSK

WLAN network. • WPA2-PSK
• EAP-PEAP with
MSCHAPv2 *
• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 no
server authentic. *
• EAP-TLS *
Security identification – Select security settings and • Trusted issuer –

download these settings via certificate
menu Data management > • Device certificate
Security > WLAN. • Device private key
User name – Enter user name. – –
WLAN password – Enter WLAN password. – –
WLAN IP address – Enter IP address of the WLAN 4 octet: 0 to 255 (in 192.168.1.212
interface of the device. the particular octet)
WLAN MAC address – Enter MAC address of the Unique 12-digit Each measuring
WLAN interface of the device. character string device is given an
comprising letters individual address.
and numbers
WLAN passphrase The WPA2-PSK option is Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit Serial number of the
selected in the Security type characters). character string measuring device
parameter. comprising numbers, (e.g. L100A802000)
 The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
characters (without
should be changed
spaces)
during commissioning
for security reasons.
Assign SSID name – Select which name will be used • Device tag User-defined
for SSID: device tag or user- • User-defined
defined name.
SSID name • The User-defined option is Enter the user-defined SSID Max. 32-digit EH_device
selected in the Assign SSID name (max. 32 characters). character string designation_last 7
name parameter. comprising numbers, digits of the serial
• The WLAN access point  The user-defined SSID
name may only be letters and special number (e.g.
option is selected in the assigned once. If the SSID characters EH_Promag_300_A
WLAN mode parameter. 802000)
name is assigned more
than once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.
Connection state – Displays the connection status. • Connected Not connected

• Not connected
Received signal strength – Shows the received signal • Low High

strength. • Medium
• High
10.5.7 Configuration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.
118 Endress+Hauser
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup
‣ Configuration backup
Operating time →  119
Last backup →  119
Configuration management →  119
Backup state →  119
Comparison result →  119
Parameter Description User interface / Selection Factory setting
Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)
Last backup Shows when the last data backup was saved Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
to HistoROM backup. (m) and seconds (s)
Configuration management Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel Cancel
the HistoROM backup. • Execute backup
• Restore *
• Compare *
• Clear backup data
Backup state Shows the current status of data saving or • None None
restoring. • Backup in progress
• Restoring in progress
• Delete in progress
• Compare in progress
• Restoring failed
• Backup failed
Comparison result Comparison of current device data with • Settings identical Check not done
HistoROM backup. • Settings not identical
• No backup available
• Backup settings corrupt
• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible
Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter
Options Description
Cancel No action is executed and the user exits the parameter.
Execute backup A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter data
of the device.
Restore The last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes the
transmitter data of the device.
Endress+Hauser 119
Options Description
Compare The device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.
Clear backup data The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of the
device.
HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.
10.5.8 Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parameters
that can be used for device administration purposes.
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
‣ Administration
‣ Define access code →  120
‣ Reset access code →  121
Device reset →  121
Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code
‣ Define access code
Define access code →  120
Confirm access code →  120
Parameter Description User entry
Define access code Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configuration Max. 16-digit character string comprising
of the device against unintentional changes. numbers, letters and special characters
Confirm access code Confirm the entered access code. Max. 16-digit character string comprising
numbers, letters and special characters
120 Endress+Hauser
Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code
‣ Reset access code
Reset access code →  121
Parameter Description User interface / User entry Factory setting
Operating time Indicates how long the device has been in Days (d), hours (h), minutes –
operation. (m) and seconds (s)
Reset access code Reset access code to factory settings. Character string comprising 0x00
numbers, letters and special
 For a reset code, contact your
Endress+Hauser service organization. characters
The reset code can only be entered via:

• Web browser
• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via CDI-RJ45
service interface)
• Fieldbus
Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation
"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Device reset Reset the device configuration - either • Cancel Cancel

entirely or in part - to a defined state. • To delivery settings
• Restart device
• Restore S-DAT backup *
10.6 Simulation
The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Endress+Hauser 121
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation
‣ Simulation
Assign simulation process variable →  123
Process variable value →  123
Current input 1 to n simulation →  124
Value current input 1 to n →  124
Status input simulation 1 to n →  124
Input signal level 1 to n →  124
Current output 1 to n simulation →  123
Current output value →  123
Frequency output 1 to n simulation →  123
Frequency output 1 to n value →  123
Pulse output simulation 1 to n →  123
Pulse value 1 to n →  123
Switch output simulation 1 to n →  123
Switch state 1 to n →  123
Relay output 1 to n simulation →  123
Pulse output simulation →  123
Pulse value →  123
Device alarm simulation →  123
Diagnostic event category →  124
Diagnostic event simulation →  124
122 Endress+Hauser

entry
Assign simulation process variable – Select a process variable for • Off Off
the simulation process that is • Volume flow
activated. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
Process variable value A process variable is selected Enter the simulation value for Depends on the 0
in the Assign simulation the selected process variable. process variable
process variable parameter selected
(→  123).
Current output 1 to n simulation – Switch the simulation of the • Off Off

current output on and off. • On
Current output value In the Current output 1 to n Enter the current value for 3.59 to 22.5 mA 3.59 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.
Frequency output 1 to n simulation In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Frequency frequency output on and off. • On
option is selected.
Frequency output 1 to n value In the Frequency simulation Enter the frequency value for 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
1 to n parameter, the On the simulation.
option is selected.
Pulse output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
parameter, the Pulse option is output simulation. • Fixed value
selected. • Down-counting
 Pulse
For Fixed value option:
width parameter value
(→  93) defines the
pulse width of the pulses
output.
Pulse value 1 to n In the Pulse output Enter the number of pulses for 0 to 65 535 0
simulation 1 to n parameter, simulation.
the Down-counting value
option is selected.
Switch output simulation 1 to n In the Operating mode Switch the simulation of the • Off Off
parameter, the Switch option switch output on and off. • On
is selected.
Switch state 1 to n – Select the status of the status • Open Open

output for the simulation. • Closed
Relay output 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the relay • Off Off

output on and off. • On
Switch state 1 to n The On option is selected in Select status of the relay • Open Open
the Switch output simulation output for the simulation. • Closed
1 to n parameter parameter.
Pulse output simulation – Set and switch off the pulse • Off Off
output simulation. • Fixed value
• Down-counting
 For Fixed value option:
Pulse width parameter value
defines the pulse width
of the pulses output.
Pulse value In the Pulse output Set and switch off the pulse 0 to 65 535 0
simulation parameter, the output simulation.
Down-counting value option
is selected.
Device alarm simulation – Switch the device alarm on and • Off Off
off. • On
Endress+Hauser 123

entry
Diagnostic event category – Select a diagnostic event • Sensor Process

category. • Electronics
• Configuration
• Process
Diagnostic event simulation – Select a diagnostic event to • Off Off

simulate this event. • Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)
Current input 1 to n simulation – Switch simulation of the • Off Off

current input on and off. • On
Value current input 1 to n In the Current input 1 to n Enter the current value for 0 to 22.5 mA 0 mA
simulation parameter, the On simulation.
option is selected.
Status input simulation 1 to n – Switch simulation of the status • Off Off

input on and off. • On
Input signal level 1 to n In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for the • High High
parameter, the On option is simulation of the status input. • Low
selected.
10.7 Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of the
measuring device from unintentional modification:
• Protect access to parameters via access code →  124
• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  64
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  126
10.7.1 Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:
• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are write-
protected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  120).
2. Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  120) to
confirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.
The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressed
for 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protected
124 Endress+Hauser
parameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  63.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display
→  63 is indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation
→ Access status
Parameters which can always be modified via the local display

Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.
Parameters for configuring Parameters for configuring

the local display the totalizer
↓ ↓
Language Format display Control Totalizer
Contrast display Preset value
Display interval Reset all totalizers
Defining the access code via the Web browser

1. Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  120).
2. Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.
3. Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  120) to
confirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to

the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  63.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser is
indicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access
status
Resetting the access code

If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code can
then be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
You can only obtain a reset code from your local Endress+Hauser service organization.
The code must be calculated explicitly for every device.
1. Note down the serial number of the device.
2. Read off the Operating time parameter.
3. Contact the local Endress+Hauser service organization and tell them the serial
number and the operating time.
 Get the calculated reset code.
Endress+Hauser 125
4. Enter the reset code in the Reset access code parameter (→  121).
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined
→  124.
For IT security reasons, the calculated reset code is only valid for 96 hours from the
specified operating time and for the specific serial number. If you cannot return to the
device within 96 hours, you should either increase the operating time you read out by
a few days or switch off the device.
10.7.2 Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows the user to
lock write access to the entire operating menu - apart from the "Contrast display"
parameter.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception
"Contrast display" parameter):
• Via local display
• Via HART protocol
1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4
A0029630
Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter, the Hardware locked option is displayed
→  127. In addition, on the local display the  symbol appears in front of the
parameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.
XXXXXXXXX
20.50
XX XX
A0029425
2. Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  127. On the local
display, the  symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the header
of the operational display and in the navigation view.
126 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Operation
11 Operation
11.1 Reading off the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter

Options Description
None The access authorization displayed in the Access status parameter applies
→  63. Only appears on local display.
Hardware locked The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) →  126.
SIL locked The SIL mode is enabled. This locks write access to the parameters (e.g. via local
display or operating tool).
Temporarily locked Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset, etc.). Once the
internal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.
11.2 Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:
• To configure the operating language →  82
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device
→  188
11.3 Configuring the display

Detailed information:
• On the basic settings for the local display →  98
• On the advanced settings for the local display →  112
11.4 Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables
‣ Process variables
Volume flow →  128
Mass flow →  128
Endress+Hauser 127
Operation Proline Promag P 300 HART
Corrected volume flow →  128
Flow velocity →  128
Conductivity →  128
Density →  128
Volume flow Displays the volume flow that is currently measured. Signed floating-point number
Dependency
The unit is taken from: Volume flow unit parameter (→  85)
Mass flow Displays the mass flow that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow unit parameter
(→  85).
Corrected volume flow Displays the corrected volume flow that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number
Dependency
The unit is taken from: Corrected volume flow unit parameter
(→  86)
Flow velocity Displays the flow velocity that is currently calculated. Signed floating-point number
Conductivity Displays the conductivity that is currently measured. Signed floating-point number
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity unit parameter
(→  85).
Density Displays the current fixed density or density read in from an Signed floating-point number
external device.
Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit parameter.
11.4.2 "Totalizer" submenu

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer
‣ Totalizer
Totalizer value 1 to n →  129
Totalizer overflow 1 to n →  129
128 Endress+Hauser
Parameter Prerequisite Description User interface
Totalizer value 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer counter Signed floating-point
Assign process variable parameter reading. number
(→  111) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.
Totalizer overflow 1 to n A process variable is selected in the Displays the current totalizer overflow. Integer with sign
Assign process variable parameter
(→  111) of the Totalizer 1 to n
submenu.
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values
‣ Input values
‣ Current input 1 to n →  129
‣ Status input 1 to n →  129
Input values of current input

The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current input.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n
‣ Current input 1 to n
Measured values 1 to n →  129
Measured current 1 to n →  129
Measured values 1 to n Displays the current input value. Signed floating-point number
Measured current 1 to n Displays the current value of the current input. 0 to 22.5 mA
Input values of status input

The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every status input.
Endress+Hauser 129
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n
‣ Status input 1 to n
Value status input →  130
Value status input Shows the current input signal level. • High
• Low
11.4.4 Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values
‣ Output values
‣ Current output 1 to n →  130
‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output →  131

1 to n
‣ Relay output 1 to n →  131
‣ Double pulse output →  132
Output values of current output

The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every current output.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n
‣ Current output 1 to n
Output current 1 to n →  131
Measured current 1 to n →  131
130 Endress+Hauser
Output current 1 Displays the current value currently calculated for the current 3.59 to 22.5 mA
output.
Measured current Displays the current value currently measured for the current 0 to 30 mA
output.
Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n
1 to n
Output frequency 1 to n →  131
Pulse output 1 to n →  131
Output frequency 1 to n In the Operating mode parameter, the Displays the value currently measured 0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz
Frequency option is selected. for the frequency output.
Pulse output 1 to n The Pulse option is selected in the Displays the pulse frequency currently Positive floating-point
Operating mode parameter parameter. output. number
Switch state 1 to n The Switch option is selected in the Displays the current switch output • Open
Operating mode parameter. status. • Closed
Output values for relay output

The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every relay output.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n
‣ Relay output 1 to n
Switch state →  132
Switch cycles →  132
Max. switch cycles number →  132
Endress+Hauser 131
Switch state Shows the current relay switch status. • Open

• Closed
Switch cycles Shows number of all performed switch cycles. Positive integer
Max. switch cycles number Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles. Positive integer
Output values for double pulse output

The Double pulse output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the
current measured values for every double pulse output.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Double pulse output
‣ Double pulse output
Pulse output →  132
Pulse output Shows the currently output pulse frequency. Positive floating-point number
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process

conditions
The following are available for this purpose:
• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  82)
• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  109)
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:
• Control Totalizer
Navigation
"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling
‣ Totalizer handling
Control Totalizer 1 to n →  133
Preset value 1 to n →  133
132 Endress+Hauser
Totalizer value 1 to n →  133
Reset all totalizers →  133

entry / User
interface
Control Totalizer 1 to n A process variable is selected Control totalizer value. • Totalize Totalize
in the Assign process variable • Reset + hold *
parameter (→  111) of the • Preset + hold *
Totalizer 1 to n submenu. • Reset + totalize
• Preset + totalize *
• Hold *
Preset value 1 to n A process variable is selected Specify start value for totalizer. Signed floating-point 0l
in the Assign process variable Dependency number
parameter (→  111) of the

The unit of the selected
process variable is
specified for the totalizer
in the Unit totalizer
Totalizer value A process variable is selected Displays the current totalizer Signed floating-point –
in the Assign process variable counter reading. number
parameter (→  111) of the
Reset all totalizers – Reset all totalizers to 0 and • Cancel Cancel

start. • Reset + totalize
11.6.1 Function scope of "Control Totalizer" parameter
Options Description
Totalize The totalizer is started or continues running.
Reset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.
1)
Preset + hold The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value parameter.
Reset + totalize The totalizer is reset to 0 and the totaling process is restarted.
1)
Preset + totalize The totalizer is set to the defined start value in the Preset value parameter and the
totaling process is restarted.
Hold Totalizing is stopped.
1) Visible depending on the order options or device settings
11.6.2 Function scope of the "Reset all totalizers" parameter
Options Description
Reset + totalize Resets all totalizers to 0 and restarts the totaling process. This deletes all the flow
values previously totalized.
Endress+Hauser 133
11.7 Show data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for the
measured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  74.
• Web browser
Function scope
• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored
• 4 logging channels
• Adjustable logging interval for data logging
• Measured value trend for each logging channel displayed in the form of a chart
/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.77
40.69 l/h
-100s 0
A0034352
• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to the
ongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to the
channels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging
‣ Data logging
Assign channel 1 →  135
Logging interval →  135
Clear logging data →  136
Data logging →  136
Logging delay →  136
Data logging control →  136
134 Endress+Hauser
Data logging status →  136
Entire logging duration →  136

entry / User
interface
Assign channel 1 The Extended HistoROM Assign process variable to • Off Off
application package is logging channel. • Volume flow
available. • Mass flow
flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity *
• Electronics
temperature
• Noise *
time *
• Reference
electrode potential
against PE *
• HBSI *
• Test point 1
• Test point 2
• Test point 3
Assign channel 2 The Extended HistoROM Assign a process variable to For the picklist, see Off
application package is logging channel. the Assign channel
available. 1 parameter
(→  135)
 The software options
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
(→  135)
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
(→  135)
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
Logging interval The Extended HistoROM Define the logging interval for 0.1 to 3 600.0 s 1.0 s
application package is data logging. This value
available. defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.
Endress+Hauser 135

entry / User
interface
Clear logging data The Extended HistoROM Clear the entire logging data. • Cancel Cancel
application package is • Clear data
available.
Data logging – Select the type of data logging. • Overwriting Overwriting

• Not overwriting
Logging delay In the Data logging Enter the time delay for 0 to 999 h 0h
parameter, the Not measured value logging.
overwriting option is selected.
Data logging control In the Data logging Start and stop measured value • None None
parameter, the Not logging. • Delete + start
overwriting option is selected. • Stop
Data logging status In the Data logging Displays the measured value • Done Done
parameter, the Not logging status. • Delay active
overwriting option is selected. • Active
• Stopped
Entire logging duration In the Data logging Displays the total logging Positive floating- 0s
parameter, the Not duration. point number
overwriting option is selected.
136 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12 Diagnostics and troubleshooting
12.1 General troubleshooting

For local display
Error Possible causes Remedy
Local display dark and no output Supply voltage does not match that Apply the correct supply voltage
signals specified on the nameplate. →  38.
Local display dark and no output The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
signals wrong.
Local display dark and no output No contact between connecting Check the connection of the cables
signals cables and terminals. and correct if necessary.
Local display dark and no output Terminals are not plugged into the Check terminals.
signals I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into the
main electronics module correctly.
Local display dark and no output I/O electronics module is defective. Order spare part →  160.
signals Main electronics module is
defective.
Local display is dark, but signal Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter by
output is within the valid range simultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker by
simultaneously pressing  + .
Local display is dark, but signal The cable of the display module is Insert the plug correctly into the
output is within the valid range not plugged in correctly. main electronics module and
display module.
Local display is dark, but signal Display module is defective. Order spare part →  160.
output is within the valid range
Backlighting of local display is red Diagnostic event with "Alarm" Take remedial measures →  147
diagnostic behavior has occurred.
Text on local display appears in a Incorrect operating language is 1. Press 2 s  +  ("home

foreign language and cannot be configured. position").
understood. 2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter
(→  115).
Message on local display: Communication between the • Check the cable and the
"Communication Error" display module and the electronics connector between the main
"Check Electronics" is interrupted. electronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  160.
For output signals

Error Possible causes Remedial action
Signal output outside the valid Main electronics module is Order spare part →  160.
range defective.
Signal output outside the valid Main electronics module is Order spare part →  160.
current range defective.
(< 3.6 mA or > 22 mA) I/O electronics module is defective.
Endress+Hauser 137
Diagnostics and troubleshooting Proline Promag P 300 HART
Error Possible causes Remedial action
Device shows correct value on local Parametrization errors Check parameterization and correct
display, but signal output is it.
incorrect, though in the valid range.
Device measures incorrectly. Configuration error or device is 1. Check and correct parameter
operated outside the application. configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified in
the "Technical Data".
For access
No write access to parameters Hardware write protection enabled Set the write protection switch on the main
electronics module to the OFF position
→  126.
No write access to parameters Current user role has limited access 1. Check user role →  63.
authorization 2. Enter correct customer-specific access code
→  63.
No connection via HART protocol Missing or incorrectly installed communication Install the communication resistor (250 Ω)
resistor. correctly. Observe the maximum load →  169.
No connection via HART protocol Commubox Observe the documentation for the Commubox.
• Connected incorrectly
• Configured incorrectly  FXA195 HART: Document "Technical
Information" TI00404F
• Drivers not installed correctly
• USB interface on computer configured
incorrectly
No connection to Web server Web server disabled Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare" operating
tool, check whether the Web server of the
measuring device is enabled, and enable it if
necessary→  70.
Incorrect settings for the Ethernet interface of 1. Check the properties of the Internet protocol
the computer (TCP/IP) →  66→  66.
2. Check the network settings with the IT
manager.
No connection to Web server Incorrect IP address Check the IP address: 192.168.1.212

→  66→  66
No connection to Web server Incorrect WLAN access data • Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using WLAN
access data.
• Check that WLAN is enabled on the
measuring device and operating device
→  66.
WLAN communication disabled –
Not connecting to Web server, FieldCare or No WLAN network available • Check if WLAN reception is present: LED on
DeviceCare display module is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection is enabled: LED on
display module flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.
Network connection not present or unstable WLAN network is weak. • Operating device is outside of reception range:
Check network status on operating device.
• To improve network performance, use an
external WLAN antenna.
Parallel WLAN and Ethernet communication • Check network settings.

• Temporarily enable only the WLAN as an
interface.
Web browser frozen and operation no longer Data transfer active Wait until data transfer or current action is
possible finished.
138 Endress+Hauser
Connection lost 1. Check cable connection and power supply.

2. Refresh the Web browser and restart if
necessary.
Content of Web browser incomplete or difficult Not using optimum version of Web server. 1. Use the correct Web browser version
to read →  65.
2. Clear the Web browser cache and restart the
Web browser.
Unsuitable view settings. Change the font size/display ratio of the Web
browser.
No or incomplete display of contents in the Web • JavaScript not enabled 1. Enable JavaScript.
browser • JavaScript cannot be enabled 2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.X.XX/servlet/
basic.html as the IP address.
Operation with FieldCare or DeviceCare not Firewall of computer or network is preventing Depending on the settings of the firewall used
possible via CDI-RJ45 service interface (port communication on the computer or in the network, the firewall
8000) must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/
DeviceCare access.
Flashing of firmware with FieldCare or Firewall of computer or network is preventing Depending on the settings of the firewall used
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service interface (via communication on the computer or in the network, the firewall
port 8000 or TFTP ports) must be adapted or disabled to allow FieldCare/
DeviceCare access.
12.2 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes
12.2.1 Transmitter
Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.
1 2 3 4 5
A0029629
1 Supply voltage
2 Device status
3 Not used
4 Communication
5 Service interface (CDI) active
LED Color Meaning
1 Supply voltage Off Supply voltage is off or too low.
Green Supply voltage is ok.
2 Device status (normal Off Firmware error

operation)
Green Device status is ok.
Flashing green Device is not configured.
Red A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior

has occurred.
Flashing red A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic

behavior has occurred.
Endress+Hauser 139
LED Color Meaning
Flashing red/green The device restarts.
2 Device status (during Flashes red slowly If > 30 seconds: problem with the boot loader.
start-up)
Flashes red quickly If > 30 seconds: compatibility problem when
reading the firmware.
3 Not used – –
4 Communication Off Communication not active.
White Communication active.
5 Service interface (CDI) Off Not connected or no connection established.
Yellow Connected and connection established.
Flashing yellow Service interface active.
140 Endress+Hauser
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display
12.3.1 Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as a
diagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition Diagnostic message
2 1
XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S
20.50 S801
Supply voltage
3
4
X XX i Menu
5
A0029426-EN
1 Status signal
2 Diagnostic behavior
3 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
4 Short text
If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of the
diagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:
• Via parameter →  151
• Via submenus →  152
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M
= Maintenance Required
Symbol Meaning
Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
• Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.
Endress+Hauser 141
Diagnostic behavior
Symbol Meaning
Alarm
• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number
↓ ↓ ↓
Example 441 Curr.output 1

A0013962 A0013958
NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107
Operating elements
Key Meaning
Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.
142 Endress+Hauser
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures
XXXXXXXXX S XXXXXXXXX S
20.50 S801
Supply voltage
X XX i Menu
1.
Diagnostic list S
Diagnostics 1
1 S801 Supply voltage
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2 Supply voltage (ID:203) 3

4 S801 0d00h02m25s 5
Increase supply voltage
6
3.
A0029431-EN
 30 Message for remedial measures

1 Diagnostic information
2 Short text
3 Service ID
4 Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
5 Operation time when error occurred
6 Remedial measures
1. The user is in the diagnostic message.

Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.
2. Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1. Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.
12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser
12.4.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on the
home page once the user has logged on.
Endress+Hauser 143
2 3
A0031056
1 Status area with status signal

2 Diagnostic information
3 Remedial measures with service ID
In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via submenu →  152
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
Symbol Meaning
Failure
A device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in the service mode (during a simulation, for example).
The device is being operated:
• Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.
The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event and
the related diagnostic information.
144 Endress+Hauser
12.5 Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare
12.5.1 Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of the
operating tool once the connection has been established.
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx Mass flow: 12.34 kg/h
Device tag: Xxxxxxx Volume flow: 12.34 m³/h
Status signal: Function check (C)
Xxxxxx
P Diagnostics 1: C485 Simu...
P Remedy information: Deactivate...
P Access status tooling: Mainenance Failure (F)
+ Operation Function check (C) 2

+ Setup Diagnostics 1: C485 Simulation measured vari...
+ Diagnostics Remedy information: Deactivate Simulation (Service...
+ Expert
Out of spezification (S) 3
Maintenance required (M)
A0021799-EN
1 Status area with status signal →  141

2 Diagnostics information →  142
3 Remedial measures with service ID
In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:
• Via submenu →  152
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you by
providing information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Status signal Short text
behavior number
↓ ↓ ↓
Example 441 Curr.output 1

A0013962 A0013958
NAMUR 3-digit number

NE 107
Endress+Hauser 145
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can be
rectified quickly:
• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.
The user is in the Diagnostics menu.

1. Call up the desired parameter.
2. On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.
12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information
12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at the
factory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior
/ ../Diagn. behavior 0723-1

Diagnostic no. 044
Warning
Diagnostic no. 274
Diagnostic no. 801
A0014048-EN
You can assign the following options to the diagnostic number as the diagnostic behavior:
Options Description
Alarm The device stops measurement. The signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined
alarm condition. A diagnostic message is generated.
The background lighting changes to red.
Warning The device continues to measure. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A
diagnostic message is generated.
Logbook entry only The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in the Event
logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and is not displayed in alternation with the
operational display.
Off The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated or entered.
12.6.2 Adapting the status signal

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific status signal at the factory. The
user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the Diagnostic
event category submenu.
Expert → Communication → Diagnostic event category
146 Endress+Hauser
Available status signals

Configuration as per HART 7 Specification (Condensed Status), in accordance with
NAMUR NE107.
Symbol Meaning
Failure
A device error is present. The measured value is no longer valid.
A0013956
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
A0013959
The device is being operated:
A0013958 • Outside of the configuration carried out by the user (e.g. maximum flow in parameter
20 mA value)
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.
A0013957
Has no effect on the condensed status.
A0023076
12.7 Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the status signal and the
diagnostic behavior can be changed. Change the diagnostic information →  146
Diagnostic Short text Remedy instructions Status Diagnostic

number signal behavior
[from the [from the
factory] factory]
Diagnostic of sensor
043 Sensor 1 short circuit 1. Check sensor cable and sensor S Warning 1)
detected 2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor
082 Data storage Check module connections F Alarm

inconsistent
083 Memory content 1. Restart device F Alarm

inconsistent 2. Restore S-DAT data
3. Replace S-DAT
143 HBSI limit exceeded 1. Check if external magnetic M Warning 1)

interference is present
2. Check flow value
3. Replace sensor
168 Build-up limit exceeded Clean measuring tube M Warning
169 Conductivity 1. Check grounding conditions M Warning

measurement failed 2. Deactivate conductivity
measurement
170 Coil resistance faulty Check ambient and process F Alarm

temperature
180 Temperature sensor 1. Check sensor connections F Warning

defective 2. Replace sensor cable or sensor
3. Turn off temperature measurement
Endress+Hauser 147

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
181 Sensor connection faulty 1. Check sensor cable and sensor F Alarm
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor
Diagnostic of electronic
201 Electronics faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Replace electronics
242 Firmware incompatible 1. Check firmware version F Alarm

2. Flash or replace electronic module
252 Module incompatible 1. Check electronic modules F Alarm

2. Check if correct modules are
available (e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules
262 Module connection 1. Check module connections F Alarm

interrupted 2. Replace electronic modules
270 Main electronics 1. Restart device F Alarm

defective 2. Replace main electronic module
271 Main electronics faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Replace main electronic module
272 Main electronics faulty Restart device F Alarm
273 Main electronics 1. Pay attention to display emergency F Alarm

defective operation
2. Replace main electronics
275 I/O module defective Change I/O module F Alarm
276 I/O module faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Change I/O module
283 Memory content Restart device F Alarm

inconsistent
302 Device verification active Device verification active, please wait. C Warning 1)
303 I/O 1 to n configuration 1. Apply I/O module configuration M Warning

changed (parameter 'Apply I/O
configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device description
and check wiring
311 Sensor electronics Maintenance required! M Warning

(ISEM) faulty Do not reset device
330 Flash file invalid 1. Update firmware of device M Warning

2. Restart device
331 Firmware update failed 1. Update firmware of device F Warning

2. Restart device
332 Writing in HistoROM 1. Replace user interface board F Alarm

backup failed 2. Ex d/XP: replace transmitter
361 I/O module 1 to n faulty 1. Restart device F Alarm

2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O module or main
electronics
372 Sensor electronics 1. Restart device F Alarm

(ISEM) faulty 2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)
373 Sensor electronics Transfer data or reset device F Alarm

(ISEM) faulty
148 Endress+Hauser

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
375 I/O- 1 to n 1. Restart device F Alarm

communication failed 2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusive
electronic modules
376 Sensor electronics 1. Replace sensor electronic module S Warning 1)

(ISEM) faulty (ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message
377 Electrode signal faulty 1. Activate empty pipe detection S Warning 1)

2. Check partial filled pipe and
installation direction
3. Check sensor cabling
4. Deactivate diagnostics 377
378 Supply voltage ISEM 1. If available: Check connection cable F Alarm

faulty between sensor and transmitter
2. Replace main electronic module
3. Replace sensor electronic module
(ISEM)
382 Data storage 1. Insert T-DAT F Alarm

2. Replace T-DAT
383 Memory content Reset device F Alarm
387 HistoROM data faulty Contact service organization F Alarm
Diagnostic of configuration
410 Data transfer failed 1. Retry data transfer F Alarm

2. Check connection
412 Processing download Download active, please wait C Warning
431 Trim 1 to n required Carry out trim C Warning
437 Configuration 1. Update firmware F Alarm

incompatible 2. Execute factory reset
438 Dataset different 1. Check data set file M Warning

2. Check device parameterization
3. Download new device
parameterization
441 Current output faulty 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check current output settings
442 Frequency output faulty 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check frequency output settings
443 Pulse output 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

faulty 2. Check pulse output settings
444 Current input 1 to n 1. Check process S Warning 1)

faulty 2. Check current input settings
453 Flow override active Deactivate flow override C Warning
484 Failure mode simulation Deactivate simulation C Alarm

active
485 Process variable Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation active
486 Current input simulation Deactivate simulation C Warning

active
491 Current output 1 to n Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation active
492 Frequency output Deactivate simulation frequency output C Warning

simulation active
Endress+Hauser 149

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
493 Pulse output simulation Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning

active
494 Switch output Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning

simulation active
495 Diagnostic event Deactivate simulation C Warning

simulation active
496 Status input simulation Deactivate simulation status input C Warning

active
502 CT activation/ Follow the sequence of the custody C Warning

deactivation failed transfer activation/deactivation: First
authorized user login, then set the DIP
switch on the main electonic module
511 Sensor setting error 1. Check measuring period and C Alarm

integration time
2. Check sensor properties
512 ECC recovery time 1. Check ECC recovery time F Alarm

exceeded 2. Turn off ECC
520 I/O 1 to n hardware 1. Check I/O hardware configuration F Alarm

configuration invalid 2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse
output on correct slot
530 Electrode cleaning active Switch off electrode cleaning C Warning
531 Empty pipe adjustment Execute EPD adjustment S Warning 1)

faulty
537 Configuration 1. Check IP addresses in network F Warning

2. Change IP address
540 Custody transfer mode 1. Power off device and toggle DIP F Alarm
failed switch
2. Deactivate custody transfer mode
3. Reactivate custody transfer mode
4. Check electronic components
543 Double pulse output 1. Check process S Warning 1)

2. Check pulse output settings
593 Double pulse output Deactivate simulation pulse output C Warning

simulation
594 Relay output simulation Deactivate simulation switch output C Warning
599 Custody transfer 1. Deactivate custody transfer mode S Warning

logbook full 2. Clear custody transfer logbook (all
30 entries)
3. Activate custody transfer mode
Diagnostic of process
803 Loop current 1 faulty 1. Check wiring F Alarm

2. Change I/O module
832 Electronics temperature Reduce ambient temperature S Warning 1)

too high
833 Electronics temperature Increase ambient temperature S Warning 1)

too low
834 Process temperature too Reduce process temperature S Warning 1)

high
835 Process temperature too Increase process temperature S Warning 1)

low
150 Endress+Hauser

[from the [from the
factory] factory]
842 Process value below Low flow cut off active! S Warning 1)
limit Check low flow cut off configuration
882 Input signal faulty 1. Check input signal parameterization F Alarm

2. Check external device
3. Check process conditions
937 Sensor symmetry 1. Eliminate external magnetic field S Warning 1)

near sensor
2. Turn off diagnostic message
938 Coil current not stable 1. Check if external magnetic F Alarm 1)

interference is present
2. Perform Heartbeat Verification
3. Check flow value
961 Electrode potential out 1. Check process conditions S Warning 1)

of specification 2. Check ambient conditions
962 Pipe empty 1. Perform full pipe adjustment S Warning 1)

2. Perform empty pipe adjustment
3. Turn off empty pipe detection
1) Diagnostic behavior can be changed.
12.8 Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and the
previous diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:
• Via local display →  143
• Via web browser →  144
• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  146
• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  146
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu
→  152
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu
 Diagnostics
Actual diagnostics →  152
Previous diagnostics →  152
Operating time from restart →  152
Endress+Hauser 151
Actual diagnostics A diagnostic event has occurred. Shows the current occured diagnostic Symbol for diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
information. and short message.
 Ifsimultaneously,
two or more messages occur
the message with
the highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics Two diagnostic events have already Shows the diagnostic event that Symbol for diagnostic
occurred. occurred prior to the current diagnostic behavior, diagnostic code
event along with its diagnostic and short message.
information.
Operating time from restart – Shows the time the device has been in Days (d), hours (h),
operation since the last device restart. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)
Operating time – Indicates how long the device has been Days (d), hours (h),
in operation. minutes (m) and seconds
(s)
12.9 Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

12.10 Event logbook
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook

A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list
152 Endress+Hauser
/ ../Eventlist F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN
• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.

• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:
• Diagnostic events →  147
• Information events →  153
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbol
that indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:
• Diagnostic event
• : Occurrence of the event
• : End of the event
• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
For filtering the displayed event messages →  153
12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook

Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message is
displayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories
• All
• Failure (F)
• Function check (C)
• Out of specification (S)
• Maintenance required (M)
• Information (I)
12.10.3 Overview of information events

Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only and
not in the diagnostic list.
Info number Info name
I1000 --------(Device ok)
I1079 Sensor changed
I1089 Power on
I1090 Configuration reset
I1091 Configuration changed
Endress+Hauser 153
I1092 HistoROM backup deleted
I1137 Electronics changed
I1151 History reset
I1155 Reset electronics temperature
I1156 Memory error trend
I1157 Memory error event list
I1256 Display: access status changed
I1264 Safety sequence aborted
I1278 I/O module restarted
I1335 Firmware changed
I1351 Empty pipe detection adjustment failure
I1353 Empty pipe detection adjustment ok
I1361 Web server: login failed
I1397 Fieldbus: access status changed
I1398 CDI: access status changed
I1443 Build-up thickness not determined
I1444 Device verification passed
I1445 Device verification failed
I1457 Measurement error verification failed
I1459 I/O module verification failed
I1461 Sensor verification failed
I1462 Sensor electronic module verific. failed
I1512 Download started
I1513 Download finished
I1514 Upload started
I1515 Upload finished
I1517 Custody transfer active
I1518 Custody transfer inactive
I1554 Safety sequence started
I1555 Safety sequence confirmed
I1556 Safety mode off
I1618 I/O module 2 replaced
I1622 Calibration changed
I1624 All totalizers reset
I1625 Write protection activated
I1626 Write protection deactivated
I1627 Web server: login successful
I1628 Display: login successful
I1629 CDI: login successful
I1631 Web server access changed
I1632 Display: login failed
154 Endress+Hauser
I1633 CDI: login failed
I1634 Reset to factory settings
I1635 Reset to delivery settings
I1639 Max. switch cycles number reached
I1643 Custody transfer logbook cleared
I1649 Hardware write protection activated
I1650 Hardware write protection deactivated
I1651 Custody transfer parameter changed
I1712 New flash file received
I1725 Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed
I1726 Configuration backup failed
12.11 Resetting the measuring device

The entire device configuration or some of the configuration can be reset to a defined state
with the Device reset parameter (→  121).
12.11.1 Function scope of "Device reset" parameter
Options Description
To delivery settings Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is reset
to the customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory setting.
Restart device The restart resets every parameter with data stored in volatile memory (RAM) to
the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.
Restore S-DAT backup Restores the data that is saved on the S-DAT. Additional information: This function
can be used to resolve the memory issue "083 Memory content inconsistent" or to
restore the S-DAT data when a new S-DAT has been installed.
 This option is displayed only in an alarm condition.
12.12 Device information

The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation
"Diagnostics" menu → Device information
‣ Device information
Device tag →  156
Serial number →  156
Firmware version →  156
Endress+Hauser 155
Device name →  156
Manufacturer →  156
Order code →  156
Extended order code 1 →  156
ENP version →  157
Device revision →  157
Device ID →  157
Device type →  157
Manufacturer ID →  157
Parameter Description User interface Factory setting
Device tag Shows name of measuring point. Max. 32 characters, such as Promag
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).
Serial number Shows the serial number of the measuring Max. 11-digit character string –
device. comprising letters and
numbers.
Firmware version Shows the device firmware version installed. Character string in the format –
xx.yy.zz
Device name Shows the name of the transmitter. Promag 300/500 –
 The name can be found on the

nameplate of the transmitter.
Manufacturer Displays the manufacturer. Character string comprising Endress+Hauser

numbers, letters and special
characters
Order code Shows the device order code. Character string composed of –
letters, numbers and certain
 The order code can be found on the
nameplate of the sensor and punctuation marks (e.g. /).
transmitter in the "Order code" field.
Extended order code 1 Shows the 1st part of the extended order Character string –
code.
 The extended order code can also be

found on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.
156 Endress+Hauser
Parameter Description User interface Factory setting
Extended order code 2 Shows the 2nd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

field.
Extended order code 3 Shows the 3rd part of the extended order Character string –
code.

field.
ENP version Shows the version of the electronic Character string 2.02.00
nameplate (ENP).
Device revision Shows the device revision with which the 2-digit hexadecimal number 7
device is registered with the HART
Communication Foundation.
Device ID Shows the device ID for identifying the 6-digit hexadecimal number –
device in a HART network.
Device type Shows the device type with which the 2-digit hexadecimal number 0x3A (for Promag 300)
measuring device is registered with the
HART Communication Foundation.
Manufacturer ID Shows the device's manufacturer ID 2-digit hexadecimal number 0x11 (for Endress+Hauser)
registered with the HART Communication
Foundation.
12.13 Firmware history

Release Firmware Order code Firmware Documentation type Documentation
date version for changes
"Firmware
version"
08.2022 01.06.zz Option 60 • HBSI (Heartbeat Technology) Operating BA01393D/06/EN/05.22

• Build-up index (Heartbeat Technology) Instructions
• Flow damping configuration
09.2019 01.05.zz Option 64 Various improvements Operating BA01393D/06/EN/02.19

Instructions
Endress+Hauser 157
Release Firmware Order code Firmware Documentation type Documentation

date version for changes
"Firmware
version"
10.2017 01.01.zz Option 68 • OPC-UA with Security new Operating BA01393D/06/EN/02.17

• Local display - enhanced performance and Instructions
data entry via text editor
• Optimized keypad lock for local display
• Web server feature update
• Support for trend data function
• Heartbeat function enhanced to include
detailed results (page 3/4 of the
report)
• Device configuration as PDF (parameter
log, similar to FDT print)
• Network capability of Ethernet (service)
interface
• Comprehensive Heartbeat feature update
• Local display - support for WLAN
infrastructure mode
• Implementation of reset code
08.2016 01.00.zz Option 76 Original firmware Operating BA01393D/06/EN/01.16

Instructions
It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface. For the compatibility of the firmware version, see the "Device
history and compatibility" section →  158
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:
• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →
Downloads
• Specify the following details:
• Product root: e.g. 5P3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on the
device.
• Text search: Manufacturer's information
• Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation
12.14 Device history and compatibility

The device model is documented in the order code on the nameplate of the device (e.g.
8F3BXX-XXX....XXXA1-XXXXXX).
Device model Release Change compared with earlier model Compatibility with
earlier model
A2 09.2019 I/O module with enhanced performance No

and functionality: see device firmware
01.05.zz →  157
A1 08.2016 – –
158 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Maintenance
13 Maintenance
13.1 Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do not
attack the surface of the housing or the seals.
13.1.2 Interior cleaning

No interior cleaning is planned for the device.
13.2 Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  162→  164
13.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Endress+Hauser 159
Repair Proline Promag P 300 HART
14 Repair
14.1 General information
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:
• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:
‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.
‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database and Netilion Analytics.
14.2 Spare parts

Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here and
can be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:
• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  156) in the Device
information submenu.
14.3 Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
14.4 Return
The requirements for safe device return can vary depending on the device type and
national legislation.
1. Refer to the web page for information:
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material
 Select the region.
2. Return the device if repairs or a factory calibration are required, or if the wrong
device was ordered or delivered.
160 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Repair
14.5 Disposal
If required by the Directive 2012/19/EU on waste electrical and electronic equipment

(WEEE), the product is marked with the depicted symbol in order to minimize the
disposal of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste. Do not dispose of products bearing this
marking as unsorted municipal waste. Instead, return them to the manufacturer for
disposal under the applicable conditions.
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device

1. Switch off the device.
LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions!
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, high
temperatures or aggressive media.
2. Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe the
safety instructions.
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that are
hazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:

‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.
Endress+Hauser 161
Accessories Proline Promag P 300 HART
15 Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress
+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question is
available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the
Endress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.
15.1 Device-specific accessories
15.1.1 For the transmitter
Accessories Description
Proline 300 transmitter Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:
• Approvals
• Output
• Input
• Display/operation
• Housing
• Software
 Order code: 5X3BXX

 Installation Instructions EA01199D
Remote display and • If ordered directly with the measuring device:
operating module Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Remote display 4-line, illuminated;
DKX001 10 m (30 ft) cable; touch control"
• If ordered separately:
• Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "W/o, prepared
for remote display"
• DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001
Mounting bracket for DKX001
• If ordered directly: order code for "Accessory enclosed", option RA "Mounting
bracket, pipe 1/2""
• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002
 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  189.

 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Accessory enclosed", option P8 "Wireless antenna wide
area".
 • applications.
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic
• Additional information regarding the WLAN interface →  73.
 Order number: 71351317

Weather protection cover Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.
 Order number: 71343505

Ground cable Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.
162 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Accessories
15.1.2 For the sensor
Ground disks Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper
measurement.
 For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D
15.2 Communication-specific accessories

Commubox FXA195 For intrinsically safe HART communication with FieldCare via the USB interface.
HART
 Technical Information TI00404F
HART Loop Converter Is used to evaluate and convert dynamic HART process variables to analog current
HMX50 signals or limit values.
 •• Technical Information TI00429F

Operating Instructions BA00371F
Fieldgate FXA42 Is used to transmit the measured values of connected 4 to 20 mA analog

measuring devices, as well as digital measuring devices
 •• Operating
Technical Information TI01297S
Instructions BA01778S
• Product page: www.endress.com/fxa42
Field Xpert SMT50 The Field Xpert SMT70 tablet PC for device configuration enables mobile plant
asset management in non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for commissioning and
maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital communication
interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver library
and is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
• Product page: www.endress.com/smt50
asset management in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. It is suitable for
commissioning and maintenance staff to manage field instruments with a digital
communication interface and to record progress.
This tablet PC is designed as an all-in-one solution with a preinstalled driver library
and is an easy-to-use, touch-sensitive tool which can be used to manage field
instruments throughout their entire life cycle.
asset management in areas categorized as Ex Zone 1.
Endress+Hauser 163
Accessories Proline Promag P 300 HART
15.3 Service-specific accessories

Accessory Description
Applicator Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:

• Choice of measuring devices with industrial requirements
• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter:
e.g. nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results
• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation and
access to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of
a project.
Applicator is available:
• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator
• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.
W@M W@M Life Cycle Management

Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a
plant and its components is generated from the first stages of planning and
during the asset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform
with online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth
data shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes
and increases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, see:
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement
FieldCare FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.

It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage
them. By using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of
checking their status and condition.
 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

DeviceCare Tool for connecting and configuring Endress+Hauser field devices.
 Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.4 System components

Memograph M graphic The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevant
data manager measured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values are
monitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
 •• Technical Information TI00133R

Operating Instructions BA00247R
iTEMP The temperature transmitters can be used in all applications and are suitable for
the measurement of gases, steam and liquids. They can be used to read in the
medium temperature.
 "Fields of Activity" document FA00006T
164 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Technical data
16 Technical data
16.1 Application
The measuring device is only suitable for the flow measurement of liquids with a minimum
conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentially
explosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use the
measuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
16.2 Function and system design
Measuring principle Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.
Measuring system The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.

The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
Information on the structure of the device →  14
16.3 Input
Measured variable Direct measured variables

• Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage)
• Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables

• Mass flow
Measuring range Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 15 to 125 (½ to 4")

Recommended
Nominal diameter Factory settings
flow
min./max. full
Full scale value
scale value Pulse value Low flow cut off
current output
(v ~ (~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
(v ~ 2.5 m/s)
0.3/10 m/s)
[mm] [in] [dm3/min] [dm3/min] [dm3] [dm3/min]
15 ½ 4 to 100 25 0.2 0.5
25 1 9 to 300 75 0.5 1
32 – 15 to 500 125 1 2
40 1½ 25 to 700 200 1.5 3
50 2 35 to 1 100 300 2.5 5
Endress+Hauser 165
Technical data Proline Promag P 300 HART
Recommended
flow
min./max. full
Full scale value
scale value Pulse value Low flow cut off
current output
(v ~ (~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
(v ~ 2.5 m/s)
0.3/10 m/s)
[mm] [in] [dm3/min] [dm3/min] [dm3] [dm3/min]
65 – 60 to 2 000 500 5 8
80 3 90 to 3 000 750 5 12
100 4 145 to 4 700 1200 10 20
125 – 220 to 7 500 1850 15 30
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 to 600 (6 to 24")

Recommended
flow
min./max. full Full scale value

Pulse value Low flow cut off
scale value current output
(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[mm] [in] [m3/h] [m3/h] [m3] [m3/h]
150 6 20 to 600 150 0.03 2.5
200 8 35 to 1 100 300 0.05 5
250 10 55 to 1 700 500 0.05 7.5
300 12 80 to 2 400 750 0.1 10
350 14 110 to 3 300 1 000 0.1 15
400 16 140 to 4 200 1 200 0.15 20
450 18 180 to 5 400 1 500 0.25 25
500 20 220 to 6 600 2 000 0.25 30
600 24 310 to 9 600 2 500 0.3 40
Flow characteristic values in US units: ½ - 24" (DN 15 - 600)

Recommended
flow

(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[in] [mm] [gal/min] [gal/min] [gal] [gal/min]
½ 15 1.0 to 27 6 0.1 0.15
1 25 2.5 to 80 18 0.2 0.25
1½ 40 7 to 190 50 0.5 0.75
2 50 10 to 300 75 0.5 1.25
3 80 24 to 800 200 2 2.5
4 100 40 to 1 250 300 2 4
6 150 90 to 2 650 600 5 12
8 200 155 to 4 850 1200 10 15
10 250 250 to 7 500 1500 15 30
12 300 350 to 10 600 2400 25 45
14 350 500 to 15 000 3600 30 60
166 Endress+Hauser
Recommended
flow

(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s)
[in] [mm] [gal/min] [gal/min] [gal] [gal/min]
16 400 600 to 19 000 4800 50 60
18 450 800 to 24 000 6000 50 90
20 500 1 000 to 30 000 7500 75 120
24 600 1 400 to 44 000 10500 100 180
Recommended measuring range

Flow limit →  183
Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1
Input signal External measured values

To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the mass flow, the
automation system can continuously write different measured values to the measuring
device:
• Medium temperature enables temperature-compensated conductivity measurement (e.g.
iTEMP)
• Reference density for calculating the mass flow
Various pressure and temperature measuring devices can be ordered from Endress
+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  164
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.
HART protocol
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the HART protocol. The pressure transmitter must support the following protocol-specific
functions:
• HART protocol
• Burst mode
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  167.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)
Current span • 4 to 20 mA (active)

• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
Resolution 1 µA
Voltage drop Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)
Maximum input voltage ≤ 30 V (passive)
Open-circuit voltage ≤ 28.8 V (active)
Possible input variables • Temperature

• Density
Endress+Hauser 167
Status input
Maximum input values • DC –3 to 30 V

• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ
Response time Configurable: 5 to 200 ms
Input signal level • Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V

• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V
Assignable functions • Off

• Reset the individual totalizers separately
• Flow override
168 Endress+Hauser
16.4 Output
Output signal Current output 4 to 20 mA HART
Order code "Output; input 1" (20):

Option BA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART
Signal mode Can be set to:

• Active
• Passive
Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA NAMUR
• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• 0 to 20 mA (only if the signal mode is active)
• Fixed current
Open-circuit voltage DC 28.8 V (active)
Maximum input voltage DC 30 V (passive)
Load 250 to 700 Ω
Resolution 0.38 µA
Damping Configurable: 0 to 999.9 s
Assignable measured • Volume flow

variables • Mass flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
Current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i
Order code "Output; input 1" (20) choose from:

• Option CA: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i passive
• Option CC: current output 4 to 20 mA HART Ex i active
Signal mode Depends on the selected order version.
Current range Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• Fixed current
Load • 250 to 400 Ω (active)

• 250 to 700 Ω (passive)
Resolution 0.38 µA

• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
Endress+Hauser 169
Current output 4 to 20 mA
Order code "Output; input 2" (21), "Output; input 3" (022):
Option B: current output 4 to 20 mA
Signal mode Can be set to:

• Active
• Passive
Current span Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• Fixed current
Maximum output values 22.5 mA
Load 0 to 700 Ω
Resolution 0.38 µA

• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
Current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive
Order code "Output; input 2" (21), "Output; input 3" (022):
Option C: current output 4 to 20 mA Ex i passive
Signal mode Passive
Current span Can be set to:

• 4 to 20 mA US
• 4 to 20 mA
• Fixed current
Maximum output values 22.5 mA
Maximum input voltage DC 30 V
Load 0 to 700 Ω
Resolution 0.38 µA
Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s

• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
170 Endress+Hauser
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Function Can be configured as pulse, frequency or switch output
Version Open collector

Can be set to:
• Active
• Passive
• Passive NAMUR
 Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)
Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V
Pulse output
Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)
Pulse width Configurable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms
Maximum pulse rate 10 000 Impulse/s
Pulse value Configurable

Frequency output
Maximum output current 22.5 mA (active)
Output frequency Configurable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz(f max = 12 500 Hz)
Pulse/pause ratio 1:1

• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
Switch output
Switching behavior Binary, conductive or non-conductive
Switching delay Configurable: 0 to 100 s
Endress+Hauser 171
Number of switching Unlimited

cycles

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value:
• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
• Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
• Empty pipe detection
• Buildup index
• HBSI limit value exceeded
Double pulse output
Function Double pulse
Version Open collector

Can be set to:
• Active
• Passive
• Passive NAMUR
Voltage drop For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V
Output frequency Configurable: 0 to 1 000 Hz
Damping Configurable: 0 to 999 s
Pulse/pause ratio 1:1

• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
Relay output
Function Switch output
Version Relay output, galvanically isolated
Switching behavior Can be set to:

• NO (normally open), factory setting
• NC (normally closed)
172 Endress+Hauser
Maximum switching • DC 30 V, 0.1 A

capacity (passive) • AC 30 V, 0.5 A

• On
• Diagnostic behavior
• Limit value:
• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Flow velocity
• Conductivity
• Totalizer 1-3
• Flow direction monitoring
• Status
• Empty pipe detection
• Buildup index
• HBSI limit value exceeded
User-configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurable
I/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:
• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Pulse/frequency/switch output
• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)
• Status input
Signal on alarm Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode Choose from:
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43
• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US
• Min. value: 3.59 mA
• Max. value: 22.5 mA
• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA
• Actual value
• Last valid value
0 to 20 mA
• Maximum alarm: 22 mA
• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output

• Actual value
• No pulses
Frequency output
Endress+Hauser 173

• Actual value
• 0 Hz
• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)
Switch output

• Current status
• Open
• Closed
Relay output

• Current status
• Open
• Closed
Local display
Plain text display With information on cause and remedial measures
Backlight Red backlighting indicates a device error.
Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Interface/protocol
• Via digital communication:
HART protocol
• Via service interface
• CDI-RJ45 service interface
• WLAN interface
Web browser
Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information Status indicated by various light emitting diodes

The following information is displayed depending on the device version:
• Supply voltage active
• Data transmission active
• Device alarm/error has occurred
 Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes →  139
Low flow cut off The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.
174 Endress+Hauser
Galvanic isolation The outputs are galvanically isolated:

• from the power supply
• from one another
• from the potential equalization (PE) terminal
Protocol-specific data Manufacturer ID 0x11
Device type ID 0x3C
HART protocol revision 7
Device description files Information and files under:

(DTM, DD) www.endress.com
HART load Min. 250 Ω
System integration Information on system integration →  78.

• Measured variables via HART protocol
• Burst Mode functionality
16.5 Power supply
Terminal assignment →  38
Supply voltage Order code for Terminal voltage Frequency range

"Power supply"
Option D DC 24 V ±20% –
Option E AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10% 50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz
DC 24 V ±20% –
Option I
AC 100 to 240 V –15 to +10% 50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz
Power consumption Transmitter

Max. 10 W (active power)
switch-on current Max. 36 A (<5 ms) as per NAMUR Recommendation NE 21
Current consumption Transmitter

• Max. 400 mA (24 V)
• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)
Power supply failure • Totalizers stop at the last value measured.

• Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).
• Error messages (incl. total operated hours) are stored.
Overcurrent protection The device must be operated with a dedicated circuit breaker, as it does not have an
element ON/OFF switch of its own.
• The circuit breaker must be easy to reach and labeled accordingly.
• Permitted nominal current of the circuit breaker: 2 A up to maximum 10 A.
Electrical connection →  38
Endress+Hauser 175
Potential equalization →  41
Terminals Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Cable entries • Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)
• Thread for cable entry:
• NPT ½"
• G ½"
• M20
Cable specification →  35
Overvoltage protection Mains voltage fluctuations →  175
Overvoltage category Overvoltage category II
Short-term, temporary overvoltage Up to 1200 V between cable and ground, for max. 5 s
Long-term, temporary overvoltage Up to 500 V between cable and ground
16.6 Performance characteristics
Reference operating • Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456
conditions • Water, typically: +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi)
• Data as indicated in the calibration protocol
• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025
Maximum measured error o.r. = of reading
Error limits under reference operating conditions

Volume flow
• ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)
• Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.
[%]
2.5
2.0
0.5 %
1.5
0.2 %
1.0
0.5
0
0 1 2 4 6 8 10 [m/s]
v
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 32 [ft/s]
A0028974
 34 Maximum measured error in % o.r.
176 Endress+Hauser
Flat Spec
In the case of Flat Spec, the measured error is constant in the range from v0.5 (v0.2) to vmax.
[%]
2.5
2.0
0.5 %
1.5
0.2 %
1.0
0.5
0
0 [m/s]
v
0 v0.5 v0.2 vmax [ft/s]
A0017051
 35 Flat Spec in % o.r.
Flat Spec flow values 0.5 %

Nominal diameter v0.5 vmax
[mm] [in] [m/s] [ft/s] [m/s] [ft/s]
25 to 600 1 to 24 0.5 1.64 10 32
50 to 300 2 to 12 0.25 0.82 5 16
Flat Spec flow values 0.2 %

Nominal diameter v0.2 vmax
[mm] [in] [m/s] [ft/s] [m/s] [ft/s]
25 to 600 1 to 24 1.5 4.92 10 32
50 to 300 2 to 12 0.6 1.97 4 13
Electrical conductivity
The values apply for:
• Devices installed in a metal pipe or in a non-metal pipe with ground disks
• Devices whose potential equalization was performed according to the instructions in the
associated Operating Instructions
• Measurements at a reference temperature of 25 °C (77 °F). At different temperatures,
attention must be paid to the temperature coefficient of the medium (typically 2.1 %/K)
Conductivity [µS/cm] Measured error [%] of reading
5 to 20 ± 20%
> 20 to 50 ± 10%
> 50 to 10 000 • Standard: ± 10%

• Optional 1): ± 5%
> 10 000 to 20 000 ± 10%
> 20 000 to 100 000 ± 20%
1) Order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW
Endress+Hauser 177
[%]
+30
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
10⁰ 10¹ 10² 10³ 10⁴ 10⁵ 10⁶ [µS/cm]
A0042279
 36 Measured error (standard)
[%]
+30
+20
+10
0
–10
–20
–30
10⁰ 10¹ 10² 10³ 10⁴ 10⁵ 10⁶ [µS/cm]
A0047944
 37 Measured error (optional: order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW)
Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.
Current output
Accuracy ±5 µA
o.r. = of reading
Accuracy Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)
Repeatability o.r. = of reading

Volume flow
Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)
Electrical conductivity
• Max. ±5 % o.r.
• With order code for "Calibrated conductivity measurement", option CW: ±2 % v.M.
Influence of ambient Current output

temperature
Temperature coefficient Max. 1 μA/°C
178 Endress+Hauser
Temperature coefficient No additional effect. Included in accuracy.
16.7 Installation
Installation conditions →  20
16.8 Environment
Ambient temperature →  25
range
Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.
Storage temperature The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of the
transmitter and the sensor →  25.
• Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
• If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.
Relative humidity The device is suitable for use in outdoor and indoor areas with a relative humidity of
4 to 95%.
Operating height According to EN 61010-1

• ≤ 2 000 m (6 562 ft)
• > 2 000 m (6 562 ft) with additional overvoltage protection (e.g. Endress+Hauser HAW
Series)
Degree of protection Transmitter

• IP66/67, Type 4X enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 4
• When the housing is open: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2
• Display module: IP20, Type 1 enclosure, suitable for pollution degree 2
Optional
Order code for "Sensor option", option C3
• IP66/67, type 4X enclosure
• Fully welded, with protective coating as per EN ISO 12944 C5-M
• For the operation of the device in corrosive environments
External WLAN antenna

IP67
Endress+Hauser 179
Vibration- and shock- Sinusoidal vibration according to IEC 60068-2-6

resistance • 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
• 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
Vibration broad-band random, according to IEC 60068-2-64

• 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz
• 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz
• Total: 1.54 g rms
Shock half-sine, according to IEC 60068-2-27

6 ms 30 g
Rough handling shocks according to IEC 60068-2-31
Mechanical load Transmitter housing:

• Protect against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact
• Do not use as a ladder or climbing aid
Electromagnetic As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)

compatibility (EMC) Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.
This unit is not intended for use in residential environments and cannot guarantee
adequate protection of the radio reception in such environments.
16.9 Process
Medium temperature range • –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")
• –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")
• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE, DN 15 to 600 (½ to 24")
180 Endress+Hauser
1 2 3 4
TA
[°F] [°C]
140 60
100 40
20
0 -20
-40 -40
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
-40 0 100 200 300 360 [°F]
A0035803
 38 PFA
TA Ambient temperature
TF Medium temperature
1 Colored area: the ambient temperature range –10 to –20 °C (+14 to –4 °F) applies to stainless flanges only
2 Hatched area: harsh environment only for medium temperature range –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F)
3 –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")
4 –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")
1
TA
[°F] [°C]
140 60
100 40
20
0 -20
-40 -40
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
-40 0 100 200 300 360 [°F]
A0029808
 39 PTFE
TA Ambient temperature
TF Medium temperature
1 Colored area: the ambient temperature range of –10 to –40 °C (+14 to –40 °F) applies to stainless flanges
only
Conductivity ≥5 μS/cm for liquids in general.
Pressure-temperature For an overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections, see
ratings the Technical Information
Endress+Hauser 181
Pressure tightness Liner: PFA

Nominal diameter Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:
[mm] [in] +25 °C (+77 °F) +80 °C (+176 °F) +100 to +180 °C
(+212 to +356 °F)
25 1 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
32 – 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
40 1½ 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
50 2 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
65 – 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
80 3 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
100 4 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
125 – 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
150 6 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
200 8 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
Liner: PTFE
Nominal diameter Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:
[mm] [in] +25 °C (+77 °F) +80 °C (+176 °F) +100 °C (+212 °F) +130 °C (+266 °F)
15 ½ 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 100 (1.45)
25 1 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 100 (1.45)
32 – 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 100 (1.45)
40 1½ 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 100 (1.45)
50 2 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 100 (1.45)
65 – 0 (0) – 40 (0.58) 130 (1.89)
80 3 0 (0) – 40 (0.58) 130 (1.89)
100 4 0 (0) – 135 (1.96) 170 (2.47)
125 – 135 (1.96) – 240 (3.48) 385 (5.58)
150 6 135 (1.96) – 240 (3.48) 385 (5.58)
200 8 200 (2.90) – 290 (4.21) 410 (5.95)
250 10 330 (4.79) – 400 (5.80) 530 (7.69)
300 12 400 (5.80) – 500 (7.25) 630 (9.14)
350 14 470 (6.82) – 600 (8.70) 730 (10.6)
400 16 540 (7.83) – 670 (9.72) 800 (11.6)
450 18
500 20 No negative pressure permitted!
600 24
182 Endress+Hauser
Flow limit The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match the
velocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the medium:
• v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive media (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry)
• v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for media producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor
nominal diameter.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section
Pressure loss • No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal
diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545
→  26
System pressure →  26
Vibrations →  26
Endress+Hauser 183
16.10 Custody transfer mode

The measuring device is optionally tested in accordance with OIML R49 and has an EU
type-examination certificate according to Measuring Instruments Directive 2014/32/EU
for service subject to legal metrological control ("custody transfer") for cold water (Annex
III).
The permitted medium temperature in these applications is 0 to +50 °C (+32 to +122 °F).
The device is used with a legally controlled totalizer on the local display and optionally
with legally controlled outputs.
Measuring devices subject to legal metrological control totalize in both directions, i.e. all
the outputs consider flow components in the positive (forward) and negative (reverse)
flow direction.
Generally a measuring device subject to legal metrological control is secured against
tampering by seals on the transmitter or sensor. These seals may normally only be opened
by a representative of the competent authority for legal metrology controls.
After putting the device into circulation or after sealing the device, operation is only
possible to a limited extent.
Detailed ordering information is available from your local Endress+Hauser sales center for
national approvals (outside Europe) as cold water meters based on OIML R49.
16.11 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions For the dimensions and installed lengths of the device, see the "Technical Information"
document, "Mechanical construction" section
Weight All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices with flanges of the
standard pressure rating.
The weight may be lower than indicated depending on the pressure rating and design.
Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing", option A
"Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:
Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
Nominal diameter EN (DIN), AS 1) ASME JIS
[mm] [in] Pressure rating [kg] Pressure rating [kg] Pressure rating [kg]
15 ½ PN 40 7.2 Class 150 7.2 10K 4.5
25 1 PN 40 8.0 Class 150 8.0 10K 5.3
32 – PN 40 8.7 Class 150 – 10K 5.3
40 1½ PN 40 10.1 Class 150 10.1 10K 6.3
50 2 PN 40 11.3 Class 150 11.3 10K 7.3
65 – PN 16 12.7 Class 150 – 10K 9.1
80 3 PN 16 14.7 Class 150 14.7 10K 10.5
100 4 PN 16 16.7 Class 150 16.7 10K 12.7
125 – PN 16 22.2 Class 150 – 10K 19
150 6 PN 16 26.2 Class 150 26.2 10K 22.5
200 8 PN 10 45.7 Class 150 45.7 10K 39.9
184 Endress+Hauser
Nominal diameter EN (DIN), AS 1) ASME JIS
[mm] [in] Pressure rating [kg] Pressure rating [kg] Pressure rating [kg]
250 10 PN 10 65.7 Class 150 75.7 10K 67.4
300 12 PN 10 70.7 Class 150 111 10K 70.3
350 14 PN 10 105.7 Class 150 176 10K 79
400 16 PN 10 120.7 Class 150 206 10K 100
450 18 PN 10 161.7 Class 150 256 10K 128
500 20 PN 10 156.7 Class 150 286 10K 142
600 24 PN 10 208.7 Class 150 406 10K 188
1) For flanges according to AS, only DN 25 and 50 are available.
Weight in US units
Nominal diameter ASME
[mm] [in] Pressure rating [lbs]
15 ½ Class 150 15.9
25 1 Class 150 17.6
40 1½ Class 150 22.3
50 2 Class 150 24.9
80 3 Class 150 32.4
100 4 Class 150 36.8
150 6 Class 150 57.7
200 8 Class 150 101
250 10 Class 150 167
300 12 Class 150 244
350 14 Class 150 387
400 16 Class 150 454
450 18 Class 150 564
500 20 Class 150 630
600 24 Class 150 895
Measuring tube Nominal Pressure rating Process connection internal diameter

specification diameter
EN ASME AS 2129 AS 4087 JIS PFA PTFE

(DIN)
[mm] [in] [bar] [psi] [bar] [bar] [bar] [mm] [in] [mm] [in]
15 ½ PN 40 Class 150 – – 20K – – 15 0.59
25 1 PN 40 Class 150 Table E – 20K 23 0.91 26 1.02
32 – PN 40 – – – 20K 32 1.26 35 1.38
40 1½ PN 40 Class 150 – – 20K 36 1.42 41 1.61
50 2 PN 40 Class 150 Table E PN 16 10K 48 1.89 52 2.05
65 – PN 16 – – – 10K 63 2.48 67 2.64
80 3 PN 16 Class 150 – – 10K 75 2.95 80 3.15
100 4 PN 16 Class 150 – – 10K 101 3.98 104 4.09
Endress+Hauser 185
Nominal Pressure rating Process connection internal diameter

diameter
EN ASME AS 2129 AS 4087 JIS PFA PTFE

(DIN)
[mm] [in] [bar] [psi] [bar] [bar] [bar] [mm] [in] [mm] [in]
125 – PN 16 – – – 10K 126 4.96 129 5.08
150 6 PN 16 Class 150 – – 10K 154 6.06 156 6.14
200 8 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K 201 7.91 202 7.95
250 10 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 256 10.1
300 12 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 306 12.0
350 14 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 337 13.3
400 16 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 387 15.2
450 18 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 432 17.0
500 20 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 487 19.2
600 24 PN 10 Class 150 – – 10K – – 593 23.3
Materials Transmitter housing

Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands
3
A0020640
 40 Possible cable entries/cable glands

1 Female thread M20 × 1.5
2 Cable gland M20 × 1.5
3 Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½" or NPT ½"
Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"

The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable gland Material
Non-Ex: plastic
Compression fitting M20 × 1.5
Z2, D2, Ex d/de: brass with plastic
Adapter for cable entry with female thread G ½" Nickel-plated brass
Adapter for cable entry with female thread NPT ½"
186 Endress+Hauser
Sensor housing
• DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")
Aluminum half-shell housing, aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
• DN 25 to 600 (1 to 24")
Fully welded carbon steel housing with protective varnish
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4301/304/1.4306/304L
For flanges made of carbon with Al/Zn protective coating (DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")) or
protective varnish (DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"))
Liner
• PFA
• PTFE
Process connections
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Stainless steel, 1.4571; carbon steel, E250C 3)/S235JRG2/P245GH
ASME B16.5
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105 3)
JIS B2220
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105/A350 LF2 3)
AS 2129 Table E
• DN 25 (1"): carbon steel, A105/S235JRG2
• DN 40 (1 ½"): carbon steel, A105/S275JR
AS 4087 PN 16
Carbon steel, A105/S275JR
Electrodes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum; tantalum;
titanium
Seals
As per DIN EN 1514-1, form IBC
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
External WLAN antenna

• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass
• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass
• Cable: Polyethylene
• Plug: Nickel-plated brass
• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
3) DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12") with Al/Zn protective varnish; DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24") with protective varnish
Endress+Hauser 187
Ground disks
• Stainless steel, 1.4435 (316L)
• Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022)
• Titanium
• Tantalum
Fitted electrodes Measuring electrode, reference electrode and empty pipe detection electrode:
• 1.4435 (316L)
• Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022)
• Tantalum
• Titanium
• Platinum
Optional: only platinum or tantalum measuring electrode
Process connections • EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)

• ASME B16.5
• JIS B2220
• AS 2129 Table E
• AS 4087 PN 16
For information on the different materials used in the process connections →  187
Surface roughness Stainless steel electrodes, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum;
tantalum; titanium:
≤ 0.3 to 0.5 µm (11.8 to 19.7 µin)
(All data refer to parts in contact with the medium)
Liner with PFA:
≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin)
(All data refer to parts in contact with the medium)
16.12 Operability
Languages Can be operated in the following languages:

• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish
• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese
Local operation Via display module

Equipment:
• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control"
• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display;
touch control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  73
188 Endress+Hauser
A0026785
 41 Operation with touch control
Display elements
• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display
• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors
• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individually
configured
• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.
Operating elements
• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,
, 
• Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra
→  162.
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.
A0026786
 42 Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001
Display and operating elements

The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  188.
Endress+Hauser 189
Housing material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choice
of transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing Remote display and operating module
Order code for "Housing" Material Material
Option A "Aluminum, coated" AlSi10Mg, coated AlSi10Mg, coated
Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".
Connecting cable
→  36
Dimensions
Information about dimensions:
"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation →  71
Service interface →  72
Supported operating tools Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units and
via a variety of interfaces.
Supported operating Operating unit Interface Additional information

tools
Web browser Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service Special Documentation for the
with Web browser interface device
• WLAN interface
DeviceCare SFE100 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  164

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol
FieldCare SFE500 Notebook, PC or tablet • CDI-RJ45 service →  164

with Microsoft Windows interface
system • WLAN interface
• Fieldbus protocol
190 Endress+Hauser
Supported operating Operating unit Interface Additional information

tools
Field Xpert SMT70/77/50 • All fieldbus protocols Operating Instructions

• WLAN interface BA01202S
• Bluetooth Device description files:
• CDI-RJ45 service Use update function of
interface handheld terminal
SmartBlue app Smart phone or tablet WLAN →  164

with iOs or Android
Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:
• FactoryTalk AssetCentre (FTAC) from Rockwell Automation →
www.rockwellautomation.com
• Process Device Manager (PDM) from Siemens → www.siemens.com
• Asset Management Solutions (AMS) from Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com
• FieldCommunicator 375/475 from Emerson → www.emersonprocess.com
• Field Device Manager (FDM) from Honeywell → www.process.honeywell.com
• FieldMate from Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com
• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The related device description files are available: www.endress.com → Downloads
Web server
Thanks to the integrated Web server the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via the WLAN interface. The structure
of the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured
values, device status information is also displayed and allows users to monitor the status of
the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters can
be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication by
computer or a mobile handheld terminal.
Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and the
measuring device:
• Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)
• Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)
• Export event list (.csv file)
• Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)
• Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)
• Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance
• Download driver for system integration
• Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  195)
Web server special documentation →  198
Endress+Hauser 191
HistoROM The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
data management comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept
There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
HistoROM backup T-DAT S-DAT
Available data • Event logbook such as diagnostic • Measured value logging ("Extended • Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
events for example HistoROM" order option) • Serial number
• Parameter data record backup • Current parameter data record (used by • Calibration data
• Device firmware package firmware at run time) • Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
• Maximum indicators (min/max values) fixed I/O or multi I/O)
• Totalizer values
Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in Attachable to the user interface board in the In the sensor plug in the transmitter neck
the connection compartment connection compartment part
Data backup
Automatic
• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules
• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing the
previous device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors
• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data are
transferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is ready
for operation again immediately without any errors
• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.
Manual
Additional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:
• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup
• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transmission
Manual
Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of the
specific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate the
configuration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)
192 Endress+Hauser
Event list
Automatic
• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures
• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
Manual
If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:
• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels
• User configurable recording interval
• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels
• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server
16.13 Certificates and approvals

Current certificates and approvals that are available for the product can be selected via the
Product Configurator at www.endress.com:
1. Select the product using the filters and search field.
2. Open the product page.
3. Select Configuration.
CE mark The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
UKCA marking The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable UK regulations (Statutory
Instruments). These are listed in the UKCA Declaration of Conformity along with the
designated standards. By selecting the order option for UKCA marking, Endress+Hauser
confirms a successful evaluation and testing of the device by affixing the UKCA mark.
Contact address Endress+Hauser UK:
Endress+Hauser Ltd.
Floats Road
Manchester M23 9NF
United Kingdom
www.uk.endress.com
RCM mark The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".
Ex approval The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions are
provided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to this
document on the nameplate.
Functional safety The measuring device can be used for flow monitoring systems (min., max., range) up to
SIL 2 (single-channel architecture; order code for "Additional approval", option LA) and SIL
Endress+Hauser 193
3 (multi-channel architecture with homogeneous redundancy) and is independently

evaluated and certified in accordance with IEC 61508.
The following types of monitoring in safety equipment are possible:
Functional Safety Manual with information on the SIL device →  197
HART certification HART interface

The measuring device is certified and registered by the FieldComm Group. The measuring
system meets all the requirements of the following specifications:
• Certified according to HART 7
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers
(interoperability)
Radio approval The measuring device has radio approval.

For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation
Pressure Equipment • With the marking:

Directive a) PED/G1/x (x = category) or
b) UK/G1/x (x = category)
on the sensor nameplate, Endress+Hauser confirms compliance with the "Essential
Safety Requirements"
a) specified in Annex I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or
b) Schedule 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.
• Devices not bearing this marking (without PED or UKCA) are designed and
manufactured according to sound engineering practice. They meet the requirements of
a) Art. 4 Para. 3 of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or
b) Part 1, Para. 8 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.
The scope of application is indicated
a) in diagrams 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU or
b) Schedule 3, Para. 2 of Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1105.
Additional certification PWIS-free

PWIS = paint-wetting impairment substances
Order code for "Service":
• Option HC: PWIS-free (version A)
• Option HD: PWIS-free (version B)
• Option HE: PWIS-free (version C)
For more information on PWIS-free certification, see "Test specification" document
TS01028D
Other standards and • EN 60529

guidelines Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory
use - general requirements
• IEC/EN 61326-2-3
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment
194 Endress+Hauser
• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments with
microprocessors
• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitters
with analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics
• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices
• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices
• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications
• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).
16.14 Application packages

Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of the
device. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently from
Endress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from your
local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:
www.endress.com.
Diagnostic functionality Order code for "Application package", option EA "Extended HistoROM"
Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of the measured
value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to 100
entries.
Data logging (line recorder):
• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The recording
interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g. FieldCare,
DeviceCare or Web server.
For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device.
Heartbeat Technology Order code for "Application package", option EB "Heartbeat Verification + Monitoring"
Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter 7.6 a)
"Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within the
framework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Endress+Hauser 195
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, to an
external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive maintenance or
process analysis. These data enable the operator to:
• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact the
process influences (e.g. formation of buildup, magnetic field interference etc.) have on
measuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality.
For detailed information, see the Special Documentation for the device.
Cleaning Order code for "Application package", option EC "ECC electrode cleaning "
The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution for
applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hot water). Since
magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors and ultimately to
the loss of signal. The application package is designed to avoid build-up of very conductive
matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).
For detailed information, see the Operating Instructions for the device.
OPC-UA Server Order code for "Application package", option EL "OPC-UA Server"
The application package provides an integrated OPC-UA server for comprehensive device
services for IoT and SCADA applications.
For detailed information, see the Special Documentation for the device.
16.15 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  162
16.16 Supplementary documentation

following:
• Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter serial number from
nameplate.
• Endress+Hauser Operations app: Enter serial number from nameplate or scan
matrix code on nameplate.
Standard documentation Brief Operating Instructions
Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor

Measuring device Documentation code
Proline Promag P KA01290D
Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter

Proline 300 KA01308D
196 Endress+Hauser
Technical Information
Promag P 300 TI01224D
Description of Device Parameters
Promag 300 GP01051D
Supplementary device- Safety instructions

dependent documentation Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.
Contents Documentation code
ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de XA01414D
ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01514D
cCSAus XP XA01515D
cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de XA01516D
cCSAus Ex nA XA01517D
INMETRO Ex d/Ex de XA01518D
INMETRO Ex ec XA01519D
NEPSI Ex d/Ex de XA01520D
NEPSI Ex nA XA01521D
EAC Ex d/Ex de XA01656D
EAC Ex nA XA01657D
JPN Ex d XA01775D
Remote display and operating module DKX001

ATEX/IECEx Ex i XA01494D
ATEX/IECEx Ex ec XA01498D
cCSAus IS XA01499D
cCSAus Ex nA XA01513D
INMETRO Ex i XA01500D
INMETRO Ex ec XA01501D
NEPSI Ex i XA01502D
NEPSI Ex nA XA01503D
Functional Safety Manual
Promag 300 SD01740D
Endress+Hauser 197
Special Documentation
Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive SD01614D
Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module SD01793D
Web server SD01658D
Remote display and operating module DKX001 SD01763D
OPC-UA Server SD02043D
Heartbeat Technology SD01640D
Web server SD01654D
Installation Instructions
Contents Comment
Installation instructions for spare part sets and • Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via Device Viewer →  160
accessories • Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  162
198 Endress+Hauser
Proline Promag P 300 HART Index
Index
A Context menu
Access authorization to parameters Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Custody transfer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 D
Adapting the status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ambient conditions Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 179
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Device history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Ambient temperature Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Device name
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 179 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Device revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
B Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Burst mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
C Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cable entries Diagnostic information
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 145
Cable entry DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 193 Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Check Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Checklist Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cleaning Diagnostics
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DIP switch
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 see Write protection switch
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Communication-specific data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Display
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 36 see Local display
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 189
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Display area
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connection In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
see Electrical connection Display values
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Endress+Hauser 199
Index Proline Promag P 300 HART
Document FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Document information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Firmware
E Release date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electrical connection Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Commubox FXA195 (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Function range
Explorer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Field Xpert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Function scope
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 AMS Device Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Field Xpert SFX350/SFX370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Field Communicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Field Xpert SMT70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, AMS Device Functional safety (SIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Manager, SIMATIC PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Functions
Operating tools see Parameters
Via HART protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 G
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
VIATOR Bluetooth modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 H
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 HART certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 HART input
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 HART protocol
Endress+Hauser services Device variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Measured variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Environment Help text
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Error messages Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
see Diagnostic messages HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 I
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Extended order code Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Influence
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
F Inspection
Field Communicator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Field Communicator 475 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Field of application Installation conditions
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Field Xpert Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Field Xpert SFX350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
200 Endress+Hauser
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Mounting dimensions

Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 see Dimensions
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mounting requirements
L Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
see Diagnostic message Mounting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
see In alarm condition
see Operational display N
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Nameplate
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
M Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Navigation view
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 O
Measured values Onsite display
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
see Process variables Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 142
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Operating height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Measuring device Operating keys
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 see Operating elements
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Operating menu
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 78 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 28 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Screw tightening torques, maximum . . . . . . . . 29 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Screw tightening torques, nominal . . . . . . . . . . 31 Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Output variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 P
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Parameter
Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Parameter settings
Menu Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Advanced setup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Burst configuration 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 80
Menus Configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Configure flow damping (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Endress+Hauser 201
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 R

Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Radio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 RCM mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Remedial measures
Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Double pulse output (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Double pulse output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Electrode cleaning cycle (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . 116 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Replacement
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) . . 92, 93, 96
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 131 S
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Nominal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Sensor
Setup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Settings
Status input 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adapting the measuring device to the process
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Totalizer (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 130 Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
WLAN settings (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 HART input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 93
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Resetting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Process conditions Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
202 Endress+Hauser
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Symbols

Show data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SIL (functional safety) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SIMATIC PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Software release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Status area For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 54
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 144 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Storage concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 System design
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 see Measuring device design
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Structure System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 T
Submenu Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 121 Temperature range
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 110 Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 188
Burst configuration 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tool
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Electrode cleaning cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Tool tip
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 see Help text
HART input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Tools
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Totalizer
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Transmitter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 131 Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Troubleshooting
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Turning the electronics housing
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 see Turning the transmitter housing
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 U
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 UKCA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Use of the measuring device
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 see Intended use
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 User interface
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Endress+Hauser 203
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
V
Version data for the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Vibration- and shock-resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
W
W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 160
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Weight
Transport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Wizard
Configure flow damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Double pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . 92, 93, 96
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
204 Endress+Hauser
*71574903*
71574903
www.addresses.endress.com

2, Promag P300 - BA01393DEN - 0522-00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2, Promag P300 - BA01393DEN - 0522-00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2, Promag P300 - BA01393DEN - 0522-00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BA01393D/06/EN/05.

22-00 Products Solutions Services

1 About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

2 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 7 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 59 10.5 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

1 About this document

1.1 Document function

1.2.1 Safety symbols

1.2.2 Electrical symbols

Direct current and alternating current

Potential equalization connection (PE: protective earth)

1.2.3 Communication-specific symbols

Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)

1.2.4 Tool symbols

1.2.5 Symbols for certain types of information

Notice or individual step to be observed

Help in the event of a problem

1.2.6 Symbols in graphics

1, 2, 3, ... Item numbers

A-A, B-B, C-C, ... Sections

Safe area (non-hazardous area)

1.3.1 Document function

Document type Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information (TI) Planning aid for your device

Operating Instructions (BA) Your reference guide

Description of Device Parameters Reference for your parameters

 The nameplate indicates which Safety Instructions (XA) apply to

1.4 Registered trademarks

2.1 Requirements for the personnel

2.2 Intended use

2.3 Workplace safety

2.4 Operational safety

2.5 Product safety

Contact address Endress+Hauser UK:

2.7 Device-specific IT security

Function/interface Factory setting Recommendation

Access code Not enabled Assign a customized access code during

WLAN Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment

WLAN security mode Enabled (WPA2- Do not change

WLAN passphrase Serial number Assign a customized WLAN passphrase during

WLAN mode Access point On an individual basis following risk assessment

Web server →  12 Enabled On an individual basis following risk assessment

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13 – On an individual basis following risk assessment

2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write protection

2.7.2 Protecting access via a password

• User-specific access code

User-specific access code

WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point

General notes on the use of passwords

2.7.3 Access via Web server

2.7.4 Access via OPC-UA

2.7.5 Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

3.1 Product design

1 Important components of a measuring device

4 Incoming acceptance and product

4.1 Incoming acceptance

Are the goods undamaged?